CA08104001E
115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 786679 Batch7 unilog cesco-content
2014-09-04
: Pdf 115826-Attachment 115826-Attachment 782114 Batch7 unilog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 126
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage January 2005 Index << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Sheet 0571 Home CA08104001E 21.0-1 Contents 20 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1 Power Circuit Breakers — DSII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-1 Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-1 Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5-1 Specifications See Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Product Specification Guide: 1995 CSI Format: Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS . . . . Section 16475 Power Circuit Breakers — DSII. . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475 Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16475 Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16904 Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16476 2004 CSI Format: Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS . . . . Section 26 28 11 Power Circuit Breakers — DSII. . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 11 Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 11 Microprocessor Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 50 Enclosed Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 26 28 16.11 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Low Voltage Circuit Breakers For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com PIN 0130100, 0120000, 0080300 21.0-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0572 This page intentionally left blank. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0573 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Index General Description Contents Magnum DS General Description . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Control Diagram. . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1-1 21.1-1 21.1-5 21.1-6 21.1-6 21.1-7 21.1-9 21 Magnum DS 22 23 Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS Breakers are power circuit breakers designed and engineered specifically for use in Magnum DS Low Voltage Switchgear assemblies applied at nominal voltages of 240, 480 and 600 Vac. Six continuous ratings — 800 amperes through 6000 amperes — are covered by only two physical breaker sizes. 24 25 Controls and indicators are functionally grouped on the front of the breakers and the through-the-door design means they are easily viewed and accessible. Magnum DS Breaker Trip Flag Three Accessory Windows Magnum DS is also suitable for use in: Digitrip RMS Trip Unit ■ Contact Status Indicator (Open or Closed) 20 26 27 28 29 UL 1558 low voltage switchgear. ■ UL 891 low voltage switchboards. ■ CSA 22.2.31 low voltage assemblies. 30 Spring Status Indicator (Charged or Discharged) 31 “Push Off” to Open Breaker Button 32 “Push On” to Close Breaker Button Manual Charging Handle Optional Operations Counter The breaker can be conveniently racked in or out, stopping at the various positions with the door closed. Optional “Off” Key Lock Padlockable Levering Device Color-Coded Breaker Position Indicators Magnum DS Breakers are 100% rated, UL listed, and are built and tested in an ISO 9000 certified facility to applicable standards including: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 34 35 Integrally designed breaker steel cassette for drawout breakers provides clear indication of connect, test and disconnect positions. 36 ANSI C37.13 NEMA SG3 ANSI C37.16 UL 1066 ANSI C37.17 CSA 22.2 ANSI C37.50 37 38 39 Faceplate controls facilitate operation of the breaker, and the three accessory mounting windows provide for easy identification. CA08104001E 33 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com The breaker spring charging handle is designed with sufficient space for operation even with a gloved hand. 40 21.1-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Home General Description 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 40 Sheet 0574 Many minor replacement functions involving the mechanism, control, and/or accessories can be easily accomplished. Two-Step Stored Energy Mechanism for Manually and Electrically Operated Breakers The potential energy is stored in the mechanism to close the breaker in five cycles or less. Sufficient energy to open the breaker remains available following the closing operation. Internal View of Magnum DS Breaker Secondary Wiring Points Field Installable Accessories (Three Maximum) Digitrip RMS Trip Unit Optional Electric Charging Motor After closing, the charging spring can be recharged to provide potential energy for reclosing following a fault, providing high continuity of service. This feature allows for the following sequence: charge – close – recharge – open – close – open. Increased Short Time and Interrupting Ratings 39 >> The contact wear indicator eliminates the need for elaborate testing to determine if the contact assembly needs replaced. 36 38 << January 2005 The current sensor viewing window on the rear of the breaker allows for easy identification of the current sensor mounted inside. 35 37 Index The stored energy mechanism, control devices, accessories and secondary contacts are easily accessible by removing the front cover that is held in place by four captive screws. This can only be done when the breaker is in the disconnect position or removed from the cell. On manually operated breakers, closing springs are charged by hand. For electrically operated breakers, springs are charged by an electric motor but can be manually charged if no power is available. 34 Designed for Easy Access, Inspection and Minimal Maintenance TOC Manual Charging Handle Padlockable Levering Device Breaker Position Indicator Secondary Contacts Arc Chute Covers This rear view of a Magnum DS drawout breaker shows the designed-in safety feature of locating the secondary contacts away from the primary disconnects. Primary Finger Cluster Disconnects Current Sensor Window Rigid Frame Housing Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS Power Circuit Breakers are available with short time ratings up to 85,000 amperes rms symmetrical and interrupting ratings up to 100,000 amperes rms symmetrical. These increased ratings far exceed ratings previously available on power circuit breakers. Positioning of the secondary contact subassembly is dedicated for installation, maintenance and testing. Top view shown with breaker cover removed, bottom of photo is front of breaker. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0575 Home TOC << >> Index Multi-finger contact structure divides the current flow, increasing the thermal carrying capability of the entire current path. As the circuit breaker is called upon to open, the toe and heel simultaneously touch. At that point, the current changes its path from the main contact to the arcing contact. As the heel lifts off, any remaining current is driven to the toe. The result is minimal arcing damage to the main contact (heel) providing for longer main contact life. Upon closing, the toe absorbs most of the impact and deals with any arcing by touching down before the heel. Once again, the main contact (heel) is protected resulting in longer life. Arc Running System Provides Higher Interrupting Capacity in Less Space Visual contact wear indicator shows when contact replacement is necessary. ■ Flexible braided current path to the contact fingers reduces necessary current carrying space and provides a smooth connection, eliminating bolted joints and contact springs. This design helps increase breaker service life by reducing localized heat buildup and mechanical stress inherent in conventional bolted joints. Arc Chute Moving Arcing Contact (Toe) Integral Arc Runner Stationary Main Contact Moving Contact Fingers 21.1-3 General Description Flexible Current Path Increases Current Carrying Capability in Less Space ■ Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Heel-toe contact structure is a single contact finger design that performs both main and arcing contact functions by controlling the arc direction. This design provides for longer contact life. ■ Integral arc runner enhances the magnetic action of the arc chute by drawing the arc into the chute with increased efficiency, reducing arcing at the toe of the contacts. This exclusive design allows for higher arcing in a smaller space, resulting in increased interrupting ratings. Alternating V Arc Chute™ quickly divides and extinguishes the arc. The V Arc Chute reaction speed protects contact material, extending contact life. Isolated View of Contact Opening Sequence 21 22 23 Figure 21.1-2. (1) Fully Closed Position Only the main contact (heel) touches and all current flow is through the main contact. XXXXXXX X X X X XXXXXXX Moving Contact Carrier Braided Flexible Shunts XXXXXXX X X X X XXXXXXX 24 25 ■ 26 27 Figure 21.1-3. (2) Simultaneous Touching of All Contacts 28 The arcing contact (toe) touches down before the main contact (heel) lifts off with current flow dividing between main (heel) and arcing (toe) contacts. 29 30 31 32 Current Flow Moving Main Contact (Heel) 20 Line Conductor Load Conductor Current Flow Current Sensor Breaker Front Figure 21.1-4. (3) Toe (Arcing) Contacts Touching 33 The main contact (heel) lifts off with the arcing contact (toe) still touching to deal with any arcing. Current flow is only through the arcing contact (toe). 34 35 Figure 21.1-1. Cross-Section of Magnum DS Heel-Toe Contact Unlike conventional power breaker designs utilizing separate arcing and main current carrying contacts, Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS Circuit Breakers perform both functions on different parts of the same contact finger. Each finger has a moving main contact (heel) and a moving arcing contact (toe). A complete movable contact is merely the combination of a number of individual fingers. 36 Arc chutes can be easily removed and inspected. The contact wear indicator on the main contact assembly can also be inspected. 37 Figure 21.1-5. (4) Fully Open Position Both the main (heel) and arcing (toe) contacts are open and there is no current flow. The arc dissipates up into the arc chute. 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.1-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Home General Description 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Rigid Frame Housing Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS Breaker utilizes a rigid frame housing — an ANSI power breaker exclusive. This housing provides the strength and stability required in the mounting of the current path and operating mechanism. Increased Uptime. Because the current path is isolated and insulated inside a two-piece interconnected housing, any potential damage that may occur during arc interruption between the poles or outside of the breaker is minimized. ■ Increased Breaker Life. By providing rigid support for the operating mechanism and the contact structure, mechanical stress is reduced, increasing reliability. ■ Design Reliability. The housing reduces the number of frame parts in comparison with conventional ANSI power breakers, providing increased reliability. ■ Rigid Frame. The engineered thermoset composite resin provides excellent structural properties, dielectric strength, and arc track resistance helping to provide the higher interrupting and short time (withstand) ratings in a smaller size. Built-in Safety Features Provide Optimum Operator Safety and System Security ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 32 Improved C-loop current path design provides dramatic improvements in both safety and efficiency. Higher current ratings increase the blow-on forces on the contact surfaces, allowing the proper downstream protective device to open, isolating the fault and increasing uptime. Positive on is indicated on the breaker faceplate. This unique interlocking feature prevents the levering door from being opened if the contacts are welded, protecting personnel from exposure to live primary contacts. Making current release prevents the breaker from closing in on a fault exceeding 25X peak ≈ 11X rms times the nominal current. Keyed sensor plug ensures error-free installation of the sensor in the field. Deadfront faceplate isolates the operator from the primary voltage when the breaker is energized. Anti-pump prevents any attempts to reclose the breaker on a short circuit fault if the close signal (mechanical or electrical) is maintained. Interlocked levering door cannot be opened until the contacts are in the open condition. Three position indicators on the faceplate for drawout mounting. Specific colors identify the breaker position. TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0576 Quality and Reliability Eaton performs consistent endurance and reliability tests on Magnum DS Breakers. Mini-Life Tests. A breaker is randomly selected from the production line daily, and tested for an average of 50 mechanical operations to assure performance as required. ■ Maxi-Life Tests. MTBF testing continuously tests Magnum DS Breakers until they fail. This identifies potential performance issues with the breaker and provides statistical analysis for further improvement. ■ 33 34 35 Breaker Position Indicator Connect. Both main and secondary contacts are connected and the breaker is ready for normal operation. ■ Test. Main disconnects are disengaged, secondary contacts are engaged. All functions of the breaker and trip unit can be tested in this position. ■ Disconnect. A storage position in the compartment but the breaker is open and disconnected. ■ 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0577 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Index A Common Family of Accessories for Both Frame Sizes Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS accessories fit all frame sizes. Accessories Factory Installed or Available as UL Listed Field Installable Kits 20 Through-the-Window Electrical Accessories 21 22 Magnum DS through-the-window accessories are installed near the right front of the breaker. The unique windows in the breaker cover enable accessories to be quickly identified by name and rating. Accessories are plug-in, providing for easy mounting and wiring to save both installation time and cost. This feature facilitates accessory changes and replacements by user personnel, eliminating the need to use factory trained personnel or outside service companies. Modular accessories are keyed for fast error-free mounting in the field. For example, the spring release can only be mounted in the center cavity. 21.1-5 23 The auxiliary switch is an internal accessory that provides remote electrical indication if the breaker is open or closed. Accessory Windows Shunt Trip. Provides remote controlled circuit breaker opening when energized by a voltage input. ■ Spring Release. Remotely closes the breaker when its coil is energized by a voltage input. ■ Undervoltage Release (UVR). Trips the breaker remotely when an existing voltage signal is lost or drops below an established threshold. 25 ■ Internal Accessories 26 27 An electric motor automatically charges the closing springs. In absence of control power, the springs can be manually charged. Auxiliary Switch. Provides the capability to remotely indicate if the breaker is open or closed. Up to six normally open and six normally closed auxiliary contacts are available for customer use. ■ Overcurrent Trip Switch (Bell Alarm). A set of normally open and normally closed contacts that indicate when a breaker trips. ■ Electrical Operator. A universal type electric motor, internally mounted in the circuit breaker, that charges the closing springs automatically, facilitating remote or local closing. ■ The accessory cavity design, unique to ANSI power breakers, is accessible in the front of the breaker. Up to three accessories can be easily installed and wired in the field. 24 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Magnum DS modular design allows customers to mount accessories in the field. 35 36 37 38 39 Through-the-window electrical accessories are identically sized, yet keyed for error-free mounting. CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 40 21.1-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Home Trip Units 20 21 22 Trip Units ❑ Eaton introduced the first microprocessorbased trip unit and has advanced the technology into a new family of UL and CSA listed Digitrip RMS Electronic and Programmable Trip Units designed and engineered exclusively for Magnum DS Breakers. ❑ ❑ ❑ 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Electronic Trip Units ❑ TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0578 Two programmable contacts for customer use. Time stamping of trip events for improved troubleshooting and diagnostics. Accuracy of 1% on current and voltage values and 2% on energy and power. Systems diagnostic information. PowerNet communications. Digitrip RMS 520 enables the user as many as nine phase and ground current protection settings for maximum flexibility in trip-curve shaping and multi-unit coordination, and adds ground current protection settings. ■ Digitrip RMS 520M adds phase, neutral and ground current metering with a four-character LCD display window. ■ Digitrip RMS 520MC adds communication of current values and breaker status (open, closed, tripped). ■ Digitrip 1150 Programmable Trip Units ■ Digitrip RMS 1150 provides programmability for more sophisticated distribution systems. ❑ Increased protection and coordination capabilities. ❑ Systems monitoring information including power factor, voltage, current, harmonic distortion values, and waveform capture with a three-line, (eight characters per line) LED display. Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit This state-of-the-art trip unit with true rms sensing can be programmed at the faceplate or remotely with a PC using the PowerNet communications system. All system parameters as well as programming information can be viewed on the easy-to-read three-line digital display window. Digitrip 520 For additional information on trip units see Section 21.5. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Legend LS — Limit Switch for Closing Spring MOT — Motor for Spring Charging SH TR — Shunt Trip SR — Spring Release Y — Anti-Pump Relay Description of Operation 1 — Motor is energized through LS contact. 2 — Motor runs and charges Closing Spring. 3 — When Closing Spring fully charged, LS contacts reverse. 4 — CIosing CS-C contact energizes SR Coil through Y, LS & “b” contacts. 5 — When Breaker closes, “b” opens and Y Coil is energized in series with SR Coil. 6 — Y contact opens to open SR Coil circuit & prevent pumping should breaker open while CS-C is held closed. Y Coil has very low drop-out voltage. 7 — LS contacts reverse and motor recharges closing springs. Pos CS Close B12 Control Power Open B15 G Close B26 Lev-in Door Switch (DC Only) SR LS CS Trip R B10 SR TR b a B27 B11 MOT B13 B14 Neg MDSEOBKR 39 Figure 21.1-6. Standard Control Diagram for Magnum Electrically Operated Breaker, in Magnum Switchgear, for ac or dc Control Source 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0579 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Index 21.1-7 Technical Data Magnum DS Ratings 20 Table 21.1-1. Magnum DS UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Frame Breaker Amperes Type Frame Type rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz Interrupting Interrupting Interrupting Short Time at 254 Vac at 508 Vac at 635 Vac Withstand Rating Available Current Sensor and Rating Fixed Internal Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating) Inst. Trip MDN-408 MDN-508 MDN-608 MDN-C08 Narrow Narrow Narrow Narrow 42 50 65 100 42 50 65 100 42 50 65 65 42 50 65 30 — — — 14 x In MDS-408 MDS-608 MDS-808 MDS-C08 MDS-L08 MDS-X08 Standard 42 Standard 65 Standard 85 Standard 100 Standard 200 Standard 200 42 65 85 100 200 200 42 65 85 100 200 42 65 85 85 — 30 MDN-412 MDN-512 MDN-612 MDN-C12 Narrow Narrow Narrow Narrow 42 50 65 100 42 50 65 100 42 50 65 65 42 50 65 30 MDS-612 MDS-812 MDS-C12 MDS-L12 MDS-X12 Standard 65 Standard 85 Standard 100 Standard 200 Standard 200 65 85 100 200 200 65 85 100 200 65 85 85 — 30 MDN-416 MDN-516 MDN-616 MDN-C16 Narrow Narrow Narrow Narrow 42 50 65 100 42 50 65 100 42 50 65 65 42 50 65 30 MDS-616 MDS-816 MDS-C16 MDS-L16 MDS-X16 Standard 65 Standard 85 Standard 100 Standard 200 Standard 200 65 85 100 200 200 65 85 100 200 65 85 85 — 30 MDN-620 MDN-C20 Narrow Narrow 65 100 65 100 65 65 65 30 MDS-620 MDS-820 MDS-C20 MDS-L20 MDS-X20 Standard 65 Standard 85 Standard 100 Standard 200 Standard 200 65 85 100 200 200 65 85 100 200 65 85 85 — 30 — — 85 — 30 MDS-625 MDS-825 MDS-C25 Standard 65 Standard 85 Standard 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 85 — — 85 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500 3000 MDS-630 MDS-830 MDS-C30 Standard 65 Standard 85 Standard 100 65 85 100 65 85 100 65 85 85 — — 85 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 3200 MDS-632 MDS-832 MDS-C32 MDS-X32 Standard 65 Standard 85 Standard 100 Double 200 65 85 100 200 65 85 100 65 85 85 85 — — 85 50 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200 4000 MDS-840 MDS-C40 MDS-X40 Double Double Double 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 85 100 50 — — 50 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000 5000 MDS-850 Double MDS-C50 Double MDS-X50 Double 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 — — 50 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000, 5000 85 100 50 100 100 100 100 — 3200, 4000, 5000, 6000 800 1200 1600 2000 2500 6000 MDS-C60 Double 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800 22 — — — 85 — 30 — — — 14 x In 23 24 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000, 1200 — — 85 — 30 — — — 14 x In 25 26 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600 27 28 — — 85 — 30 — 14 x In 21 29 200, 250, 300, 400, 600, 630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000 30 31 32 33 34 35 Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS Trip Unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published Short Time Withstand Rating. These interrupting ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an opening operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Magnum DSL Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with Integral Current Limiters. Current Limiter selected determines short time and fixed instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac. Magnum DSX Current Limiting Power Circuit Breaker with Fast Opening Contacts. Contact Eaton for product rating. Breaker applied with fan cooling in tested enclosure. 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.1-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Home TOC Index << >> Technical Data January 2005 Sheet 0580 Table 21.1-2. Digitrip RMS Adjustable Trip Settings 20 21 22 23 24 Time/Current Characteristics Pickup Setting Pickup Point (see note) Time Band, Seconds Long Delay 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8 0.9, 0.95, 1.0 In Times Long Delay Setting 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 (at 6 times pickup value) Instantaneous Off, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10 M1 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 M1 In Times Instantaneous Setting — — Ir Times Short Delay Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 (Flat Response) 0.1 , 0.3 , 0.5 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75, 1.00 (1200 A Maximum) In Times Ground Fault Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 (Flat Response) 0.1 , 0.3 , 0.5 Short Delay Ground Fault I2t Response. Note: In = Rating Plug Value, Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting Times In Table 21.1-3. Magnum DS Breaker Control Device Voltages and Application Data 25 26 27 28 Breaker Control Device 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac Shunt Trip Circuit Voltage Power Consumption (Inrush) 70 to 110% (Required for 35 ms) 17 – 26 Vdc 250 Watts 34 – 53 Vdc 250 Watts 77 – 138 Vdc 450 Watts 154 – 275 Vdc 450 Watts 77 – 140 Vac 450 VA 146 – 264 Vac 450 VA Close Circuit Voltage Power Consumption (Inrush) 70 to 110% (Required for 200 ms) 17 – 26 Vdc 250 Watts 34 – 53 Vdc 250 Watts 77 – 138 Vdc 450 Watts 154 – 275 Vdc 450 Watts 77 – 140 Vac 450 VA 146 – 264 Vac 450 VA Spring Charge Motor Voltage Amps (Running) Amps (Inrush) Power Consumption Charging Time 85 to 110% Running % of Running 20 – 26 Vdc 12.0 Amps 300% 300 Watts 5 Sec 41 – 53 Vdc 5.0 Amps 500% 250 Watts 5 Sec 94 – 138 Vdc 2.0 Amps 600% 250 Watts 5 Sec 187 – 225 Vdc 1.0 Amps 600% 250 Watts 5 Sec 93 – 140 Vdc 2.0 Amps 600% 250 VA 5 Sec 177 – 264 Vdc 1.0 Amps 600% 250 VA 5 Sec 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0581 Home TOC << >> Index Application Standards Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS circuit breakers meet or exceed all applicable requirements of ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA. System Voltage and Frequency Magnum DS breakers are designed for operation on ac systems only, 60 Hz or 50 Hz, 635 volts maximum. Continuous Current Ratings Unlike transformers, generators and motors, circuit breakers are maximumrated devices and have no built-in temporary overload current ratings. Consequently, it is vital that each application takes into consideration the maximum anticipated current demand, initial and future, including temporary overloads. The continuous rating of any Magnum DS breaker is limited to the sensor rating, or the frame size current rating, whichever is the lesser. For instance, an MDS-616 1600 ampere frame breaker with 800 ampere sensors has a maximum continuous rating of 800 amperes, but the same breaker with 1600 ampere sensors is limited to 1600 amperes maximum. All current ratings are based on a maximum ambient air temperature of 40°C (104°F). Ambient Temperature The temperature of the air surrounding the enclosure should be within the limits of: -30°C (-22°F) to +40°C (104°F). Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS 21.1-9 Application Data Altitude The breakers are applicable at their full voltage and current ratings up to a maximum altitude of 6,600 feet (2,012 m) above sea level. When installed at higher altitudes, the ratings are subject to the following correction factors in accordance with ANSI C37.20.1: Table 21.1-4. Altitude Derating Factors Altitude Meters Voltage Current Correction Correction 6,600 7,000 7,500 2,012 2,134 2,286 1.000 .989 .976 1.000 .998 .995 8,000 8,500 9,000 2,438 2,591 2,743 .963 .950 .933 .993 .990 .987 9,500 10,000 10,500 2,896 3,048 3,200 .917 .900 .883 .983 .980 .977 11,000 11,500 12,000 3,353 3,505 3,658 .867 .850 .833 .973 .970 .967 12,500 13,000 3,810 3,962 .817 .800 .963 .960 Feet Unusual Environmental and Operating Conditions Special attention should be given to applications subject to the following conditions: 1. Damaging or hazardous fumes, vapors, etc. 2. Excessive or abrasive dust. For such conditions, it is generally recommended that the switchgear be installed in a clean, dry room, with filtered and/or pressurized clean air. This method permits the use of standard indoor switchgear and avoids the derating effect of non-ventilated enclosures. 3. Salt spray, excessive moisture, dripping, etc. Drip shields in equipment rooms and space heaters in indoor switchgear, or outdoor weatherproof enclosures, may be indicated, depending upon the severity of the conditions. 4. Excessively high or low ambient temperatures. For ambient temperatures exceeding 40°C, and based on a standard temperature rise of 65°C, the continuous current ratings of breaker frame sizes, and also buses, current transformers, etc., will be subject to a derating factor calculated from the following formula: 105°C ° Total – Special Ambient, °C ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------105°C ° Total – 40°C ° Standard Ambient Circuit breakers are not adversely affected by very low outdoor ambient temperatures, particularly when energized and carrying load currents. The standard space heaters in weatherproof switchgear will raise the temperature slightly and prevent condensation. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Electrical components such as relays and instruments, however, must be applied within the manufacturer’s specified limits. 29 5. Exposure to seismic shock. 30 Magnum DS assemblies and breakers have been certified for applications through UBC Zone 4 and for the California Building Code. Assembly modifications are required, so such conditions must be specified. 6. Abnormally high frequency of operation. In line with above, a lesser number of operations between servicing, and more frequent replacement of parts, may be indicated. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.1-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Application Data 20 21 22 23 24 Application Transformer Main Secondary Breakers Transformer secondary breakers are required or recommended for one or more of the following purposes: 1. To provide a one-step means of removing all load from the transformer. 2. To provide transformer overload protection in the absence of an individual primary breaker, and/or when primary fuses are used. 25 3. To provide the fastest clearing of a short circuit in the secondary main bus. 26 4. To provide a local disconnecting means, in the absence of a local primary switch or breaker, for maintenance purposes. 27 28 5. For automatic or manual transfer of loads to alternate sources, as in double-ended secondary selective unit substations. 29 6. For simplifying key interlocking with primary interrupter switches. 30 7. To satisfy NEC service entrance requirements when more than six feeder breakers are required. 31 32 33 34 35 Main secondary breakers must have adequate interrupting ratings, but not necessarily adequate continuous current ratings. They should be able to carry continuously not only the anticipated maximum continuous output of the transformer but also any temporary overloads. Maximum capabilities of transformers of various types, can be found in Section 14.0 It will be noted that the maximum ratings will often require the substitution of larger frame main breakers than those listed in the tables. Even if a self-cooled transformer only is considered, it should be remembered that with ratings of 750 kVA and higher, provision for the future addition of cooling fans is automatically included. It is recommended that the main breaker have sufficient capacity for the future fan-cooled rating, plus an allowance for overloads, if possible, particularly since load growth cannot always be predicted. The same considerations should be given to the main bus capacities and main current transformer ratios. Bus Sectionalizing (Tie) Breakers The minimum recommended continuous current rating of bus sectionalizing or tie breakers, as used in double-ended secondary selective unit sub-stations, or for connecting two single-ended substations, is one-half that of the associated main breakers. The interrupting rating should be at least equal to that of the feeder breakers. It is common practice to select the tie breaker of the next frame size below that of the main breakers. However, many users and engineers prefer that the tie breaker be identical to and interchangeable with the main breakers, so that under normal conditions it will be available as a spare main breaker. In general, the tie breaker, like the main breaker, trip unit should have its instantaneous tripping defeated. Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0582 Generator Breakers In most applications where generators are connected through breakers to the secondary bus, they are used as emergency standby sources only, and are not synchronized or paralleled with the unit substation transformers. Under these conditions, the interrupting rating of the generator breaker will be based solely on the generator kVA and subtransient reactance. This reactance varies with the generator type and rpm, from a minimum of approximately 9% for a 2-pole 3600 rpm turbine driven gener ator to 15% or 20% or more for a medium or slow speed engine type generator. Thus the feeder breakers selected for the unit substation will usually be adequate for a standby generator of the same kVA as the transformer. Most generators have a 2-hour 25% overload rating, and the generator breaker must be adequate for this overload current. Selective type long and short delay trip protection only is usually recommended for coordination with the feeder breakers, with the long delay elements set at 125% to 150% of the maximum generator current rating for generator protection. In the case of two or more paralleled generators, anti-motoring reverse power relays (device 32) are recommended for protection of the prime movers, particularly piston type engines. For larger generators requiring a Magnum MDS-632 or larger, voltage-restraint type overcurrent relays (device 51V) are recommended. For a fully selective system, instantaneous protection on main breakers should be defeated, as they typically cannot be coordinated with downstream devices. 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0583 Home TOC << >> Index Application Feeder Breakers — General Circuit breakers for feeder circuit protection may be manually or electrically operated, with long and short delay or long delay and instantaneous type trip devices, and trip settings, as required for the specific circuit and load requirements. General purpose feeder breakers, such as for lighting circuits, are usually equipped with long delay and instantaneous trip devices, with the long delay pickup set for the maximum load demand in the circuit. Where arcing fault protection is required, the instantaneous trip setting should be as low as practicable consistent with inrush requirements. Motor Starting Feeder Breakers These breakers are usually electrically operated, with long delay and instantaneous tripping characteristics for motor running, locked rotor and fault protection. The breaker sensor rating should be chosen so that the long delay pickup can be set at 125% of motor full load current for motors with a 1.15 service factor, or at 115% for all other motors. Contactors are recommended for this application when there are a number of daily operations involved. When system short circuits are less than 40 times the motor full load current, the motor breaker tripping characteristic should include a short delay characteristic for greater fault protection. Repetitive Duty Repetitive breaker opening and closing, such as in frequent motor starting and stopping, are covered by ANSI standards C37.13 and C37.16. These standards list the number of operations between servicing (adjusting, cleaning, lubrication, tightening, etc.) and the total numbers of operations under various conditions without requiring replacement of parts, for the various breaker frame sizes. Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS 21.1-11 Application Data For motor starting duty, with closing starting currents up to 600% and opening running currents up to 100% of the breaker frame size, at 80% power factor or higher, the endurance or total operations (not requiring parts replacement) will be as follows: 800 A Frame: 1400 operations 1600 A Frame: 400 operations The frequency of operation should not exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in one hour. Group Motor Feeder Breakers Typical loads for such circuits are motor control centers. The feeder breakers may be either manually or electrically operated as preferred, and are usually equipped with long and short delay trip protection only for coordination with the individual motor circuit devices. The minimum long delay pickup setting should be 115% of the running current of the largest motor in the group, plus the sum of the running circuits of all other motors. Zone Selective Interlocking By definition, a selectively coordinated system is one where by adjusting trip unit pickup and time delay settings, the circuit breaker closest to the fault trips first. The upstream breaker serves two functions: (1) back-up protection to the downstream breaker and (2) protection of the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers. These elements are provided for on Digitrip trip units. For faults which occur on the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers it is ideally desirable for the upstream breaker to trip with no time delay. This is the feature provided by zone selective interlocking. Digitrip trip units include this option. Zone selective interlocking is a communication signal between trip units applied on upstream and downstream breakers. Each trip unit must be applied as if zone selective interlocking were not employed, and set for selective coordination. During fault conditions, each trip unit which senses the fault sends a restraining signal to all upstream trip units. This restraining signal results in causing the upstream trip to continue timing as it is set. In the absence of a restraining signal, the trip unit trips the associated breaker with no intentional time delay, minimizing damage to the fault point. This restraining signal is a very low level. To minimize the potential for induced noise, and provide a low impedance interface between trip units, twisted pair conductors are utilized for interconnection. Ground fault and short delay pickup on Digitrip Trip Units have zone selective interlocking. Zone selective interlocking may be applied as a type of bus differential protection. It must be recognized, however, that one must accept the minimum pickup of the trip unit for sensitivity. It must also be recognized that not all systems may be equipped with zone selective interlocking. Systems containing multiple sources, or where the direction of power flow varies, require special considerations, or may not be suitable for this feature. Digitrip zone interlocking has been tested with up to three levels with up to 20 trip units per level. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.1-12 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Magnum DS Application Data 15000 50 00 32 10000 00 25 00 00 16 During-Weld Amperes (rms) 5000 00 12 00 10 00 80 0 2000 0 40 0 30 0 Sheet 0584 0 T = Long Time Delay Setting in seconds (range is 2-24 seconds) 0 iw = rms value of the welding current in amperes 25 20 500 In = Rating plug current value in amperes 29 200 The memory is filled during the weld and empties during the non-welding period of the duty cycle. 30 31 33 >> The size of the thermal memory is 30 T (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds. It fills at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds, and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds/second, where: 60 28 32 << January 2005 The Magnum DS microprocessor-based true rms sensing devices have a thermal memory and are well suited for this service. The thermal memory functions prevent exceeding the breaker and cable maximum permissible thermal energy level. The circuit also replicates time dissipation of thermal energy. 20 23 27 40 00 22 26 Index The application of Eaton’s CutlerHammer Magnum DS circuit breakers to resistance welding circuits is shown in Figure 21.1-7 of the Sensor Selection Guide. Sensor ratings only are given; the breaker frame must be selected as required for interrupting ratings. Sensor Rating, Amperes 21 25 TOC Resistance Welding 20 24 Home 100 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Percent Duty Cycle 30 40 50 60 Figure 21.1-7. Magnum DS Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance Welding Applications These welding applications are based on long delay and instantaneous trip devices with the following settings. The long time delay setting is based on the weld amperes and duty cycle. Instantaneous trip setting is two times the average weld amperes (weld amperes times percent duty cycle) or higher. Note: Making Current Release (MCR) may prevent closing the breaker during a welding cycle. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0585 Home TOC << >> Index 21.2-1 General Description Contents DSII/DSLII General Description . . . . . . . . Current Limiters (DSLII) . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Control Diagram . . . . Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Data. . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Type DSII Circuit Breaker Features 21.2-1 21.2-3 21.2-4 21.2-4 21.2-4 21.2-5 21.2-9 Type DSII Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 20 Protection During Levering Operation. When levering the breaker between the connected, test and disconnected positions, the operator is protected by a steel barrier (faceplate) from contact with live parts. 21 22 Two-Step Stored Energy Closing Mechanism. Spring charging (1) and spring release to close breaker (2) are independent operations, and always give positive control of the instant of closing. 23 24 Motor Operated Stored-Energy Closing Mechanisms. Supplied on electrically operated breakers. Standard control voltages are 48, 125 and 250 dc, and 120 and 240 ac. 25 26 Remote Closing and Tripping. Can be accomplished with manually operated breakers by charging the closing mechanism manually, then closing and tripping it remotely through electric spring release and shunt trip coils; available as optional attachments. DSII with 910 Trip Unit Type DSII Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers provide: 100% rated, fully selective protection. ■ Integral microprocessor-based breaker tripping systems. ■ Two-step stored-energy breaker closing. ■ And many other features for coordinated, safe, convenient, trouble-free and economical control and protection of low voltage distribution systems. Maximum Ratings 600 Vac. 5000 amperes continuous. ■ 200,000 amperes short circuit capacity. ■ ■ Digitrip RMS Integral MicroprocessorBased Breaker Overcurrent Trip Systems. Provides maximum reliability, true rms sensing as standard, excellent repeatability, and requires minimum maintenance. No external control source is required. Change in Trip Rating. The overcurrent trip pickup range is established by a combination of trip unit rating plugs and the rating of the current sensors on the breaker. Interphase Barriers on Breakers. Provide maximum insulation security. The barriers are easily removable for breaker inspection. Provision for Padlocking. All breakers include provision for padlocking open to prevent electrical or manual closing. This padlocking also secures the breaker in the connected, test or disconnected position by preventing levering. Ease of Inspection and Maintenance. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type DSII breakers are designed for maximum accessibility and the utmost ease of inspection and maintenance. 27 28 Two-Step Stored-Energy Closing Two-step stored energy closing gives operator positive control of closing after spring mechanism is charged. Breaker can’t close while still being charged. Operation is optional — full manual, full electric, or manual charge and electric close. On manual breakers, the spring mechanism is manually charged by one downward stroke of the lever without pumping, and released by the mechanical “push-to-close” release button. On electrically operated breakers, the mechanism is normally charged and released electrically, but can be charged manually by pumping the charging lever 10 to 12 times and released mechanically. An interlock discharges the closing springs as the breaker is removed from the compartment. The system is patterned after 5 kV and 15 kV Metal-Clad switchgear. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.2-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Home General Description 20 21 22 23 24 Arc Chute Levering Mechanism There are three basic means of extinguishing an arc: lengthening the arc path; cooling by gas blast or contraction; deionizing or physically removing the conduction particles from the arc path. It was the discovery by Westinghouse of this last method which made the first large power air circuit breaker possible. The worm gear levering mechanism is self-contained on the breaker drawout element and engages slots in the breaker compartment. A removable crank is used to lever the breaker between the Connected-TestDisconnected and Removed positions. The DE-ION principle is incorporated in all of these circuit breakers. This makes possible faster arc extinction for given contact travel; ensures positive interruption and minimum contact burning. 25 26 Arcing Contact Spring Mechanical interlocking is arranged so that levering cannot be accomplished unless the breaker is in the opened position. Stored-Energy Mechanism A cam-type closing mechanism closes the breaker. It receives its energy from a spring which can be charged by a manual handle on the front of the breaker or by a universal electric motor. Stationary Arcing Contacts TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0586 Release of the stored energy is accomplished by manually depressing a bar on the front of the breaker or electrically energizing a releasing solenoid. Contacts All Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer air circuit breakers have solid block, silver tungsten, inlaid main contacts. This construction ensures lasting current-carrying ability, which is not seriously impaired even after repeated fault interruptions or repeated momentary overload. The main contacts are of the butt type and are composed of a multiplicity of fingers to give many points of contact without alignment being critical. Interphase Barriers 27 Secondary Disconnecting Contacts 28 29 Molded Base 30 31 Moving Arcing Contact Stationary Main Contact Fingers 32 33 Moving Contact Assembly Insulating Link 34 Levering Device Arm (Connected Position) 35 36 37 Sensors Main Disconnecting Contacts Insulating Link Lock Nut DSII Breaker Pole Unit DSII Breaker Rear View 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0587 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Index 21.2-3 General Description Type DSLII Limiter Type Air Circuit Breakers 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 DSLII-620 Front View DSLII-620 Rear View Application Scope of Fault Interruption Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type DSLII breakers are coordinated combinations of Type DSII breakers and series connected current limiters. They are intended for applications requiring the overload protection and switching functions of air circuit breakers on systems whose available fault currents exceed the interrupting rating of the breakers alone, and/or the withstand ratings of “downstream” circuit components. With properly selected and coordinated limiters, it is expected that the breaker itself will clear overloads and faults within its interrupting rating, leaving the limiters intact and undamaged. The limiters will provide fast interruption of fault currents beyond the breaker rating, up to a maximum of 200,000 amperes symmetrical. Thus, on overloads and faults within the breaker interrupting rating, the breaker protects the limiters; on higher fault currents exceeding the breaker rating, the limiters protect the breaker. Sizes and Arrangements Types DSLII-308 (800 ampere), DSLII-516 (1600 ampere), and DSLII-620 (2000 ampere) frame breakers include the limiters integrally mounted on the drawout breaker elements in series with the upper terminals. Current limiters used in Types DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 combinations are mounted on separate drawout trucks in an additional equal size compartment. Protection Against Single Phasing Loads are protected against single phase operation by interlock arrangements which trip the circuit breaker whenever any one limiter blows. The breaker cannot be reclosed on a live source until there are three unblown limiters in the circuit. On the Types DSLII-308, DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 breakers, the primaries of small auxiliary transformers are connected in parallel with the limiters. The voltage between the ends of an unblown limiter is zero, but when any limiter blows, the associated transformer is energized and (1) operates an indicator identifying the blown fuse and (2) picks up a solenoid which raises the breaker trip bar, holding the breaker mechanically trip-free. The DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 combinations with separately mounted limiters operate on the same principle except that the solenoid operates a micro-switch which trips the breaker electrically through a shunt trip coil. 27 28 29 30 31 32 Safety Features The integral fuses on Types DSLII-308, DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 breakers are inaccessible until the breaker is completely withdrawn from its compartment, thereby ensuring complete isolation. Likewise, the Types DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 fuses are inaccessible until the separate fuse truck is completely withdrawn and the fuses isolated. The fuse truck is key interlocked with the breaker to prevent withdrawal or insertion unless the breaker is locked open. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.2-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Home TOC Index << >> General Description — Accessories/Trip Units 20 Optional Breaker Attachments and Accessories 21 A. Shunt trip on manually operated breakers, for any standard control voltage. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 B. Auxiliary contacts on manually or electrically operated breakers. Maximum of five normally open and five normally closed contacts are available on any breaker, manually or electrically operated. The contact rating is 10 amperes. F. Electric Lockout (optional on manual breakers). In order to close the breaker after manually charging the closing mechanism, it is necessary to operate an electrical pushbutton on the breaker faceplate. This pushbutton is wiredout to the secondary contacts so it may be wired in series with any required external interlocking. The mechanical “push-to-close” bar is made inoperative when the breaker is in the connected position. C. Compartment position switch, six or 12 contacts, actuated by movement of drawout breaker between the connected and test positions. Most common uses are for disconnecting remote control circuits of electrically operated breaker, and for bypassing “b” interlocking auxiliary contacts, when breaker is withdrawn to test position. G. Electric close release on manually operated breakers, for any standard control voltage. Breaker can be closed by remote control switch or pushbutton after the closing spring is manually charged. D. Undervoltage trip (ac and dc available). Acts to trip the breaker when the voltage on its solenoid coil is insufficient to restrain a spring-loaded core. The dropout point is within 30 to 60% of the nominal coil voltage and is not adjustable. Available as either instantaneous or time delay type. The time delay is within two to seven seconds after zero voltage occurs, and is not adjustable. The device automatically resets when the breaker opens; approximately one minute is required for resetting of the time delay type. Electronic Trip Units E. Overcurrent trip switch (OTS). A latching type switch with two independent contacts either normally open or normally closed. Operates only when the breaker is tripped automatically on an overload or fault condition. It may be used for alarm and/or interlocking circuits. Resetting is done by a pushbutton on the breaker faceplate, or by a remote switch through an optional reset coil. H. Operation counter. I. Latch check switch. Eaton offers the most comprehensive range of electronic trip units in the industry for power circuit breakers. Digitrip electronic trip units are ac devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true rms current sensing means for proper correlation with thermal characteristics Legend LS — Limit Switch for Closing Spring MOT — Motor for Spring Charging SH TR — Shunt Trip SR — Spring Release Y — Anti-Pump Relay Description of Operation 1 — Motor is energized through LS contact. 2 — Motor runs and charges Closing Spring. 3 — When Closing Spring fully charged, LS contacts reverse. 4 — CIosing CS-C contact energizes SR Coil through Y, LS & “b” contacts. 5 — When Breaker closes, “b” opens and Y Coil is energized in series with SR Coil. 6 — Y contact opens to open SR Coil circuit & prevent pumping should breaker open while CS-C is held closed. Y Coil has very low drop-out voltage. 7 — LS contacts reverse and motor recharges closing springs. January 2005 Sheet 0588 of conductors and equipment. The primary function of the Digitrip electronic trip unit is to provide circuit protection. This is achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip unit when preset current levels and time delay settings are exceeded. By sampling the current waveform at various points on the wave and calculating true rms current, the Digitrip is able to reduce nuisance tripping events due to non-sinusoidal wave shapes. Electronic trip units are applied to distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination are called for. In addition, electronic trip units can provide further enhanced features such as alarming, diagnostics, system monitoring and communications. Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip units for power breakers fall into two main categories: Front adjustable trip units: Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810, 910. ■ Programmable trip units: Digitrip OPTIM 750, 1050. ■ For additional information on trip units see Section 21.4. CS (or PB) Close Ind. G Lts. MOT SR CS (or PB) Trip R SHTR Y Y LS b LS b a Figure 21.2-1. Standard Control Diagram for Type DSII Electrically Operated Breaker, in DSII Switchgear, for ac or dc Control Source 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0589 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Index Technical Data DSII Ratings Maximum voltages at which the interrupting ratings in Table 21.2-1 apply are: Table 21.2-1. Interrupting Ratings of Type DSII Breakers Breaker Type Frame Size, Amperes Ratings, rms Symmetrical Amperes Short Time Rating Interrupting Rating 208-240 V 480 V 600 V 208-240 V 480 V 600 V 800 800 800 42,000 65,000 65,000 30,000 50,000 65,000 30,000 42,000 50,000 30,000 50,000 65,000 30,000 50,000 65,000 30,000 42,000 50,000 DSII-516 DSII-616 DSII-620 1600 1600 2000 65,000 65,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 42,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 42,000 50,000 50,000 DSII-632 DSII-840 DSII-850 3200 4000 5000 85,000 130,000 130,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 65,000 85,000 85,000 Short circuit ratings of non-automatic breakers except the DSII-840 and DSII-850 which are 65,000. Table 21.2-2. Digitrip RMS Adjustable Trip Settings Time/Current Characteristic Pickup Setting Pickup Point (see note) Time Band, Seconds Long Delay 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0 In Times Long Delay Setting 2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 (at 6 times pickup value) Instantaneous 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6 M1=8, M2=12 In Times Instantaneous Setting — Short Delay 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6 S1=8, S2=10 Ir Times Short Delay Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 (Flat Response) 0.1 , 0.3 , 6.5 Ground Fault A (.25), B (.3), C (.35), D (.4), E (.5), F (.6), H (.75), K (1.0) (1200A Maximum) In Times Ground Fault Setting 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 (Flat Response) 0.1 , 0.3 , 0.5 I2t Response. Note: In = Rating Plug Value Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In. Table 21.2-3. Interrupting Ratings of Type DSLII Breakers Type DSLII-308 DSLII-516 DSLII-620 DSLII-632 DSLII-840 Frame Size, Amperes 800 1600 2000 3200 4000 Maximum Interrupting Rating, rms Symmetrical Amperes, System Voltage 600 or Below 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 Control Voltage 48 dc 125 dc 250 dc 120 ac 240 ac Close current (SR), ampere Shunt trip current, ampere Spring charge motor ampere 5.0 5.0 7.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 Control voltage range: Close — Trip — 38 – 56 28 – 56 100 – 140 70 – 140 200 – 280 140 – 280 104 – 127 60 – 127 208 – 254 208 – 254 Note: Motor currents are running currents; inrush is approximately 400%. Motor running time to charge spring approximately 5 seconds. Table 21.2-5. Estimated Heat Loss Per Breaker Watts DSII-308 (DSLII-308) DSII-516 (DSLII-516) DSII-620 (DSLII-620) 400 (600) 1000 (1500) 1500 (2250) DSII-632 DSII-840 DSII-850 2400 3000 4700 DSII-FT32 DSII-FT40 3600 4500 CA08104001E System Voltage Maximum Voltage 21 208 or 240 480 600 254 508 635 22 These interrupting ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an opening operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short-time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 second each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. Table 21.2-7. Available Sensor Ratings for Digitrip RMS Breaker Type Frame Sensor Size, Ratings, Amperes Amperes 23 24 25 26 27 28 DSII-308, DSLII-308, DSII-508 or DSII-608 800 200, 300, 400, 600, 800 DSII-516, DSLII-516 or DSII-616 1600 200, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600 DSII-620 2000 200, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000 30 DSLII-620 DSII-632, DSLII-632 DSII-840, DSLII-840 DSII-850 2000 3200 4000 5000 2000 2400, 3200 3200, 4000 5000 31 Table 21.2-8. Available Digitrip RMS Rating Plugs Marked 50/60 Hertz Sensor Ratings, Plug Rating Amperes in Amperes (In) Table 21.2-4. Control Voltages and Currents Breaker Type 20 Table 21.2-6. Maximum Voltage Rating DSII-308 DSII-508 DSII-608 21.2-5 200 300 400 29 32 33 100, 200 200, 250, 300 200, 250, 300, 400 34 600 800 1200 300, 400, 600 400, 600, 800 600, 800, 1000, 1200 35 1600 2000 2400 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 1600, 2000, 2400 3200 4000 5000 1600, 2000, 2400, 3000, 3200 2000, 2400, 3200, 4000 3200, 4000, 5000 2000 ampere is the only plug available for DSLII-620. Note: The rating plug is for 50 and 60 Hz applications. Rating plugs are not interchangeable with 60 Hz or 50 Hz only rating plugs. 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.2-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Home TOC Index << >> Technical Data 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 The following curves illustrate the ratings, melting time-current characteristics and current limiting, or let-through characteristics, of limiters for Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Type DSLII breakers. The let-through current for a given limiter application is readily determined by extending a vertical line from the applicable maximum available symmetrical fault amperes at the bottom margin to the characteristic line for the particular limiter, and from this intersection extending a horizontal line to the left margin and reading the peak current. The withstand rating of any circuit elements protected by the limiters should be at least equal to this peak current. It will be noted that the let-through current increases with the limiter size or ampere rating; in other words, the maximum current limiting effect is obtained with the smallest size. This effect is to be expected, since the resistance decreases as the rating increases. If the vertical line from the bottom margin as described in the previous paragraph does not intersect the limiter characteristic line, it is indicated that the available system fault current is below the “threshold” current of that limiter, and it will offer no current limiting effect. The current limiting principle is illustrated below: la = The Available Peak Fault Current tm = The Melting Time Limiter Selection The selection of a suitable limiter rating for a given application is generally governed by a choice of the following types of protection: A. Maximum protection of “downstream” components. Type DSLII breakers are often used for this purpose even when the maximum available fault currents are within the interrupting rating of the corresponding Type DSII unfused breakers. Breaker Type 38 39 Breaker Type Available Limiters, Amperes DSLII-632 DSLII-840 2500, 3000, 4000 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000 Recommended Maximum 2000 2000 2000 DSLII-308 DSLII-308 DSLII-516 600 800 600 800 1200 800 1200 1600 2000 2000 2000 3000 DSLII-516 DSLII-516 DSLII-516 DSLII-620 800 1200 1600 2000 1000 2000 — — 2000 2500 3000 3000 3000 3000 — — For use only when protection of downstream equipment is required. Not completely coordinated with breaker to avoid nuisance blowing. Lowest rating which can be coordinated with breaker to minimize nuisance blowing. Highest available ratings, for protection of breaker only. Table 21.2-11. Sensor, Plug and Limiter Selection DSII Breakers Sensor Rating, Plug Rating, Amperes Amperes 308, 508, 608 200 300 400 600 800 516, 616 Limiter Rating, Amperes (Applicable only to DSLII Breakers) 100, 200 200, 250, 300 200, 250, 300, 400 300, 400, 600 400, 600, 800 250, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000 400, 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000 600, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000 800, 1200, 1600, 2000 1200, 1600, 2000 200 300 400 600 800 1200 1600 100, 200 200, 250, 300 200, 250, 300, 400 300, 400, 600 400, 600, 800 600, 800, 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 800, 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000 2000, 2500, 3000 3000 620 200 300 400 600 800 1200 1600 2000 100, 200 200, 250, 300 200, 250, 300, 400 300, 400, 600 400, 600, 800 600, 800, 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 632 2400 3200 1600, 2000, 2400 2500, 3000, 4000 1600, 2000, 2400, 3000, 3200 2500, 3000, 4000 840 3200 4000 1600, 2000, 2400, 3200 2000, 2400, 3200, 4000 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000 2500, 3000, 4000, 5000 850 5000 3200, 4000, 5000 Not Applicable ta Table 21.2-9. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 Available Limiters Minimum 1200 1200 1200 tc Figure 21.2-2. Current Limiting Limiter Rating, Amperes 250 400 600 Ip 37 Sensor Rating, Amperes 200 300 400 Ia tm Minimum, recommended, and maximum limiter sizes for Eaton’s CutlerHammer Types DSLII-308, DSLII-516, and DSLII-620 breakers are given in table. DSLII-308 DSLII-308 DSLII-308 34 36 Case A would tend to use the smallest available limiter; Case B the largest. When downstream protection is required, the selection is usually a compromise, since certain small limiters cannot be coordinated with the breaker to avoid nuisance blowing on overloads or small and moderate short circuits. Table 21.2-10. DSLII Limiter Selection tc = The Total Interrupting (Clearing) Time 35 Sheet 0590 B. Protection of the circuit breaker only. Ip = The Peak Let-Through Current ta = The Arcing Time January 2005 Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable 3000 2000 ampere is the only plug available for DSLII-620. 3000 ampere is the only limiter available for DSLII-620. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E Sheet 0591 Home TOC << >> Index 4000 3000 2000 40 50 60 500 600 700 800 900 1000 30 400 20 300 5 6 7 8 9 10 200 4 3 70 80 90 100 SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES 2 1 1000 900 800 700 600 500 20 400,000 1000 900 800 700 600 500 300,000 400 400 200,000 300 300 200 AMPERE RATING 2 2 Pr od uc e 3 an 4 3 400 irc ui tc 4 40,000 30,000 300 250 ur re nt C 10 9 8 7 6 5 20,000 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .4 5000 .3 .3 4000 .2 .2 .1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 24 .04 .04 .03 .03 .02 .02 7000 25 6000 3000 26 2000 27 SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES Ref. Curve No. 639771 Type DSL-206 Limiters — For DSL-206 and DSLII-308 Breakers 200,000 90,000 100,000 70,000 80,000 60,000 50,000 40,000 30,000 20,000 9000 10,000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES .01 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000 4000 3000 2000 40 50 60 400 30 500 600 700 800 900 1000 20 300 5 6 7 8 9 10 200 4 70 80 90 100 1000 3 Figure 21.2-3. DSLII-308 Average Melting Time-Current Characteristics 28 Ref. Curve No. 639772 Supersedes AD 36-783 dated April 1990 Supersedes AD 36-783 dated April 1990 Type DSL-206 Limiters — For DSL-206 and DSLII-308 Breakers January 1997 January 1997 29 Figure 21.2-5. DSLII-308 Let-Through Characteristics 30 6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000 5000 40 50 60 4000 30 3000 20 2000 6 7 8 9 10 600 700 800 900 1000 5 500 4 400 3 300 2 200 1 70 80 90 100 SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES 1000 900 800 700 600 500 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 400 300 300 400,000 300,000 AMPERE RATING 200,000 200 2500 e od uc 33 Pr 40,000 an 10 9 8 7 50,000 tc 10 9 8 7 6 60,000 ui 20 800 30,000 irc 30 20 6 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .4 5000 .3 .3 4000 .2 .2 re 5 20,000 34 um m ax i M 10,000 9000 8000 35 7000 6000 36 3000 .1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .04 .03 .03 32 1000 C 30 1200 70,000 nt 40 1600 80,000 C ur 40 2000 100,000 90,000 Pe ak 100 90 80 70 60 50 MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS 100 90 80 70 60 50 TIME IN SECONDS 31 3000 3000 1600 2000 2500 1200 1000 800 Limiter Ampere Rating TIME IN SECONDS 200 23 10,000 9000 8000 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 2 22 600 C 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 50,000 ak 20 60,000 Pe 30 um 30 1200 800 70,000 im 40 1600 80,000 ax 40 100,000 90,000 M 100 90 80 70 60 50 MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS 100 90 80 70 60 50 .01 1 21 2000 TIME IN SECONDS 600 800 1200 1600 2000 250 300 400 Limiter Ampere Rating 200 TIME IN SECONDS 21.2-7 Technical Data 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000 January 2005 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII 2000 37 200,000 90,000 100,000 70,000 80,000 60,000 50,000 40,000 30,000 20,000 9000 10,000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 .02 .02 2000 1000 1000 .01 6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000 5000 40 50 60 4000 30 3000 20 2000 6 7 8 9 10 600 700 800 900 1000 5 400 4 500 3 300 2 200 1 70 80 90 100 AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES .01 38 SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES Type DSL-416 Limiters — For DSL-416, DSLII-516, DSL-420 and DSLII-620 Breakers Type DSL-416 Limiters — For DSL-416, DSLII-516, DSL-420 and DSLII-620 Breakers Ref. Curve No. 639431 Supersedes AD 36-783 dated April 1990 January 1997 Figure 21.2-4. DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 Average Melting Time-Current Characteristics Supersedes AD 36-783 dated April 1990 39 January 1997 Figure 21.2-6. DSLII-516 and DSLII-620 Let-Through Characteristics DSL-420 and DSLII-620 — use only 3000 limiter. DSL-420 and DSLII-620 — use only 3000 limiter. CA08104001E Ref. Curve No. 639432 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 40 21.2-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Home TOC Index << >> 26 4000 3000 2000 40 50 60 500 600 700 800 900 1000 30 400 20 300 5 6 7 8 9 10 200 4 5000 4000 3000 Ampere Rating Limiter 40 30 20 20 10 90 80 70 60 50 10 90 80 70 60 50 40 40 30 30 20 20 10 9 8 7 6 5 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .4 .3 .3 .2 .2 .1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .1 .09 .08 .07 .06 .05 .04 .04 Sheet 0592 400,000 100 90 80 70 60 50 AMPERE RATING 300,000 5000 4000 200,000 3000 100,000 90,000 80,000 70,000 60,000 od uc e 50,000 Ci rc ui tc an Pr 40,000 Cu rr en t 30,000 um Pe ak 20,000 M ax im TIME IN SECONDS TIME IN SECONDS 2500 MAXIMUM PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT, AMPS 25 3 30 22 24 2 40 21 23 1 70 80 90 100 SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES 100 90 80 70 60 50 2500 20 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000 Technical Data January 2005 10,000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 29 Ref. Curve No. 705503 Supersedes AD 36-783 dated April 1990 Figure 21.2-7. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 Average Melting Time-Current Characteristics 200,000 70,000 80,000 60,000 50,000 40,000 30,000 20,000 9000 10,000 8000 Type DSL-632 Limiters — For DSL-632, and DSLII-632 Breakers Type DSL-840 Limiters — For DSL-840, and DSLII-840 Breakers Ref. Curve No. 705504Supercedes AD 36-783 dated April 1990 January 1997 January 1997 30 7000 AVAILABLE CURRENT, RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES Type DSL-632 Limiters — For DSL-632, and DSLII-632 Breakers Type DSL-840 Limiters — For DSL-840, and DSLII-840 Breakers 90,000 100,000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10,000 40 50 60 4000 30 3000 20 2000 5 6 7 8 9 10 400 4 500 600 700 800 900 1000 3 300 2 6000 1000 5000 .01 4000 .01 1 3000 .02 2000 .03 2000 1000 .03 .02 200 28 70 80 90 100 27 Figure 21.2-8. DSLII-632 and DSLII-840 Let-Through Characteristics 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0593 Home TOC << >> Index Application Standards Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer DSII circuit breakers meet or exceed all applicable requirements of ANSI Standards C37.13, C37.17, C37.50 and CSA. System Voltage and Frequency DSII breakers are designed for operation on ac systems only, 60 Hz or 50 Hz, 635 volts maximum. Continuous Current Ratings Unlike transformers, generators and motors, circuit breakers are maximumrated devices and have no built-in temporary overload current ratings. Consequently, it is vital that each application takes into consideration the maximum anticipated current demand, initial and future, including temporary overloads. The continuous rating of any DSII breaker is limited to the sensor rating, or the frame size current rating, whichever is the lesser. For instance, a DS-616 1600 ampere frame breaker with 800 ampere sensors has a maximum continuous rating of 800 amperes, but the same breaker with 1600 ampere sensors is limited to 1600 amperes maximum. All current ratings are based on a maximum ambient air temperature of 40°C (104°F). Ambient Temperature The temperature of the air surrounding the enclosure should be within the limits of: -30°C (-22°F) to +40°C (104°F). Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII 21.2-9 Application Data Altitude The breakers are applicable at their full voltage and current ratings up to a maximum altitude of 6,600 feet (2,012 m) above sea level. When installed at higher altitudes, the ratings are subject to the following correction factors in accordance with ANSI C37.20.1: Table 21.2-12. Altitude Derating Factors Altitude Meters Voltage Current Correction Correction 6,600 7,000 7,500 8,000 2,012 2,134 2,286 2,438 1.000 .989 .976 .963 1.000 .998 .995 .993 8,500 9,000 9,500 10,000 2,591 2,743 2,896 3,048 .950 .933 .917 .900 .990 .987 .983 .980 10,500 11,000 11,500 12,000 3,200 3,353 3,505 3,658 .883 .867 .850 .833 .977 .973 .970 .967 12,500 13,000 3,810 3,962 .817 .800 .963 .960 Feet Unusual Environmental and Operating Conditions Special attention should be given to applications subject to the following conditions: 1. Damaging or hazardous fumes, vapors, etc. 2. Excessive or abrasive dust. For such conditions, it is generally recommended that the switchgear be installed in a clean, dry room, with filtered and/or pressurized clean air. This method permits the use of standard indoor switchgear and avoids the derating effect of non-ventilated enclosures. 3. Salt spray, excessive moisture, dripping, etc. Drip shields in equipment rooms and space heaters in indoor switchgear, or outdoor weatherproof enclosures, may be indicated, depending upon the severity of the conditions. 4. Excessively high or low ambient temperatures. For ambient temperatures exceeding 40°C, and based on a standard temperature rise of 65°C, the continuous current ratings of breaker frame sizes, and also buses, current transformers, etc., will be subject to a derating factor calculated from the following formula: 105°C ° Total – Special Ambient, °C ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------105°C ° Total – 40°C ° Standard Ambient Circuit breakers are not adversely affected by very low outdoor ambient temperatures, particularly when energized and carrying load currents. The standard space heaters in weatherproof switchgear will raise the temperature slightly and prevent condensation. Electrical components such as relays and instruments, however, must be applied within the manufacturer’s specified limits. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 5. Exposure to seismic shock. DSII assemblies and breakers have been certified for applications through UBC Zone 4 and for the California Building Code. Assembly modifications are required, so such conditions must be specified. 31 6. Abnormally high frequency of operation. 33 In line with above, a lesser number of operations between servicing, and more frequent replacement of parts, may be indicated. 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.2-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Application Data 20 Application Feeder Breakers — General 21 22 23 24 25 26 Circuit breakers for feeder circuit protection may be manually or electrically operated, with long and short delay or long delay and instantaneous type trip devices, and trip settings, as required for the specific circuit and load requirements. General purpose feeder breakers, such as for lighting circuits, are usually equipped with long delay and instantaneous trip devices, with the long delay pickup set for the maximum load demand in the circuit. Where arcing fault protection is required, the instantaneous trip setting should be as low as practicable consistent with inrush requirements. Motor Starting Feeder Breakers 27 28 29 30 31 32 These breakers are usually electrically operated, with long delay and instantaneous tripping characteristics for motor running, locked rotor and fault protection. The breaker sensor rating should be chosen so that the long delay pickup can be set at 125% of motor full load current for motors with a 1.15 service factor, or at 115% for all other motors. Contactors are recommended for this application when there are a number of daily operations involved. When system short circuits are less than 40 times the motor full load current, the motor breaker tripping characteristic should include a short delay characteristic for greater fault protection. Repetitive Duty Repetitive breaker opening and closing, such as in frequent motor starting and stopping, are covered by ANSI standards C37.13 and C37.16. These standards list the number of operations between servicing (adjusting, cleaning, lubrication, tightening, etc.) and the total numbers of operations under various conditions without requiring replacement of parts, for the various breaker frame sizes. For motor starting duty, with closing starting currents up to 600% and opening running currents up to 100% of the breaker frame size, at 80% power factor or higher, the endurance or total operations (not requiring parts replacement) will be as follows: 800 A Frame: 1400 operations 1600 A Frame: 400 operations The frequency of operation should not exceed 20 starts in 10 minutes or 30 in one hour. Group Motor Feeder Breakers Typical loads for such circuits are motor control centers. The feeder breakers may be either manually or electrically operated as preferred, and are usually equipped with long and short delay trip protection only for coordination with the individual motor circuit devices. The minimum long delay pickup setting should be 115% of the running current of the largest motor in the group, plus the sum of the running circuits of all other motors. Zone Selective Interlocking 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 By definition, a selectively coordinated system is one where by adjusting trip unit pickup and time delay settings, the circuit breaker closest to the fault trips first. The upstream breaker serves two functions: (1) back-up protection to the downstream breaker and (2) protection of the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers. These elements are provided for on Digitrip trip units. Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0594 Zone selective interlocking is a communication signal between trip units applied on upstream and downstream breakers. Each trip unit must be applied as if zone selective interlocking were not employed, and set for selective coordination. During fault conditions, each trip unit which senses the fault sends a restraining signal to all upstream trip units. This restraining signal results in causing the upstream trip to continue timing as it is set. In the absence of a restraining signal, the trip unit trips the associated breaker with no intentional time delay, minimizing damage to the fault point. This restraining signal is a very low level. To minimize the potential for induced noise, and provide a low impedance interface between trip units, a special secondary connector is added to the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Magnum DS breaker, and twisted pair conductors are utilized for interconnection. For this reason, zone selective interlocking must be specified. Ground fault and short delay pickup on Digitrip Trip Units may be specified with zone selective interlocking. Since most system faults start as arcing ground faults, zone selective interlocking on ground fault pickup only is usually adequate. Zone selective interlocking on short delay pickup may be utilized where no ground fault protection is provided. Zone selective interlocking may be applied as a type of bus differential protection. It must be recognized, however, that one must accept the minimum pickup of the trip unit for sensitivity. It must also be recognized that not all systems may be equipped with zone selective interlocking. Systems containing multiple sources, or where the direction of power flow varies, require special considerations, or may not be suitable for this feature. Digitrip zone interlocking has been tested with up to three levels with up to 20 trip units per level. For faults which occur on the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers it is ideally desirable for the upstream breaker to trip with no time delay. This is the feature provided by zone selective interlocking. Digitrip trip units may be specified to utilize this option. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0595 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — DSII Index 21.2-11 Application Data Resistance Welding The application of Eaton’s CutlerHammer DSII circuit breakers to resistance welding circuits is shown in Figure 21.2-9 of the Sensor Selection Guide. Sensor ratings only are given; the breaker frame must be selected as required for interrupting ratings. Sensor Rating, Amperes 15000 40 00 32 10000 00 24 The DSII Digitrip microprocessor-based true rms sensing devices have a thermal memory and are well suited for this service. The thermal memory functions to prevent exceeding the breaker and cable maximum permissible thermal energy level. The circuit also replicates time dissipation of thermal energy. 00 00 20 16 During-Weld Amperes (rms) 5000 00 12 00 80 0 The size of the thermal memory is 30 T (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds. It fills at a rate of (iw / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds/second, trips at 30T seconds, and empties at the rate of (In / In)2 unit Amperes2 seconds/second, where 60 0 2000 40 0 30 24 25 26 27 iw = rms value of the welding current in amperes 28 In = Rating plug current value in amperes 29 The memory is filled during the weld and empties during the non-welding period of the duty cycle. 30 10 0 100 4 23 0 0 3 22 T = Long Time Delay Setting in seconds (range is 2 – 24 seconds) 15 200 21 0 20 500 20 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 Percent Duty Cycle 30 40 50 60 Figure 21.2-9. Type DSII Breaker Sensor Selection Guide for Resistance Welding Applications These welding applications are based on long delay and instantaneous trip devices with the following settings. The long time delay setting is based on the weld amperes and duty cycle. Instantaneous trip setting is two times the average weld amperes (weld amperes times percent duty cycle) or higher. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.2-12 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0596 This page intentionally left blank. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0597 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 21.3-1 General Description Molded Case Circuit Breakers 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Contents General Description Circuit Breaker Components and Functions . . . . . Cutler-Hammer Family Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Application Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . World Standard Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Current Trip Curve Characteristics . . . . . . . . Selection Data Frame Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupting, Ampere and Voltage Ratings . . . . . . QUICKLAGT Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . QUICKLAG Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid Operated, Remote-Controlled Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Numbering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRI-PAC (Fused) Circuit Breaker Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-2 21.3-3 21.3-3 21.3-3 21.3-4 21.3-5 21.3-5 21.3-6 21.3-7 21.3-7 21.3-12 21.3-14 21.3-15 21.3-19 21.3-20 21.3-30 21.3-31 Earth Leakage Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Circuit Protector Selection Data . . . . . . . . . Electronic Trip Unit Selection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Circuit Breaker Accessories . . . . . . . Application Information Voltage, Frequency, Continuous Amperes . . . . . . Cable Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker Sizing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . Motor Branch Circuits/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitor Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer Protection/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unusual Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker Temperatures, Ambient . . . . . . . . Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welding Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mining Service Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Generator Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molded Case Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 – 415 Hz Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% Rated Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series Rated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series Combination Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panelboard Replacement Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3-33 21.3-34 21.3-44 21.3-45 30 31 32 21.3-50 21.3-50 21.3-51 21.3-52 21.3-53 21.3-54 21.3-56 21.3-56 21.3-56 21.3-57 21.3-57 21.3-57 21.3-57 21.3-59 21.3-60 21.3-62 21.3-65 21.3-68 21.3-83 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers General Description 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 General Circuit Breaker Information Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as, “. . . a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions,” and furthermore as, “. . . a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material.” The NEC describes them as, “A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-automatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.” So designed, Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. Circuit Breaker Components and Functions Being essentially a high interrupting capacity switch with repetitive elements, Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers are comprised of three main functional components. These are: trip elements, operating mechanism and arc extinguishers. Trip Elements The function of the trip element is to trip the operating mechanism in the event of a prolonged overload or short circuit current. To accomplish this, a thermalmagnetic trip action is provided. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Thermal trip action is achieved through the use of a bimetal heated by the load current. On a sustained overload, the bimetal will deflect, causing the operating mechanism to trip. Because bimetals are responsive to the heat emitted by the current flow, they allow a long time delay on light overloads, yet they have a fast response on heavier overloads. Magnetic trip action is achieved through the use of an electromagnet in series with the load current. This provides an instantaneous tripping action when the current reaches a predetermined value. Front adjustable magnetic trip elements are supplied as standard on 250 ampere frame circuit breakers and above (except 100 and 150 ampere magnetic only breakers), all other thermal-magnetic breakers have non-adjustable magnetic trip elements. Electronic rms Trip Breakers Both the overload trip action and the short circuit trip action of breakers with Digitrip electronic trip units are achieved by the use of current transformers and solid-state circuitry that monitors the current and initiates tripping through a flux shunt trip when an overload or short circuit is present. All multiple pole circuit breakers have trip elements in each pole and a common trip bar. An abnormal circuit condition in any one pole will cause all poles to open simultaneously. ■ ■ ■ 39 ■ ■ ■ 40 TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0598 Trip unit adjustments are made by setting switches on the front of the trip unit or by programming the trip unit electronically. All electronic rms trip breakers are equipped with a manual push-to-trip mechanism. Operating Mechanism The function of the operating mechanism is to provide a means of opening and closing the breaker contacts. All mechanisms are of the quick-make, quick-break type and are “trip free.” “Trip free” mechanisms are designed so that the contacts cannot be held closed against an abnormal circuit condition and are sometimes referred to as an “overcenter toggle mechanism.” In addition to indicating whether the breaker is “on” or “off,” the operating mechanism handle indicates when the breaker is “tripped” by moving to a position midway between the extremes. This distinct trip point is particularly advantageous where breakers are grouped, as in panelboard applications, because it clearly indicates the faulty circuit. The operating mechanism contains a positive on feature. In the normal switching operation, the handle of the circuit breaker shall not be capable of being left readily at or near the off position when the main contacts are closed. Arc Extinguishers The function of the DE-ION arc extinguisher is to confine, divide and extinguish the arc drawn between opening breaker contacts. It consists of specially shaped steel grids isolated from each other and supported by an insulating housing. When the contacts are opened, the arc drawn induces a magnetic field in the grids, which in turn draws the arc from the contacts and into the grids. The arc is thus split into a series of smaller arcs and the heat generated is quickly dissipated through the metal. These two actions result in a rapid removal of ions from the arc, which hastens dielectric buildup between the contacts and results in rapid extinction of the arc. Electronic rms trip breakers can include trip features such as: ■ 38 Home ■ ■ Adjustable long-time pickup. Adjustable short-time pickup. Adjustable long delay time. Adjustable short delay time. Adjustable instantaneous pickup. Adjustable ground fault pickup. Adjustable ground fault delay time. Zone selective interlocking. Communications. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0599 Home TOC << >> Index Cutler-Hammer Family Molded Case Circuit Breakers In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This family of circuit breakers includes: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Thermal-magnetic trip breakers. Electronic rms trip breakers. Molded case switches. Motor circuit protectors. Earth leakage breakers. Current limiting breakers. Special application breakers. World breakers. Interrupting Ratings Molded case circuit breakers are available in various interrupting capacities. Standard interrupting capacity breakers are available in both industrial and replacement circuit breaker lines. These breakers have interrupting capacities up to 35 kA at 480 Vac. High interrupting capacity breakers are similar to standard interrupting capacity breakers, but the improved performance makes these breakers suited for use in today’s network systems where higher fault currents exist. These breakers have interrupting capacities up to 65 kA at 480 Vac. For applications that call for very high interrupting ratings, current limiting high interrupting capacity breakers are available. These breakers offer true current limiting characteristics in the same physical frame size as the high interrupting capacity version and have interrupting capacities of 100 kA at 480 Vac. Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 21.3-3 General Description Thermal-Magnetic Trip Breaker Motor Circuit Protectors Cutler-Hammer thermal-magnetic breakers are general purpose devices suitable for the majority of breaker applications and are considered the industry standard. Available from 15 through 800 amperes, thermalmagnetic breakers provide accurate reliable overload and short circuit protection for conductors and connected apparatus. Application flexibility of Cutler-Hammer motor circuit protectors (Type GMCP/ HMCP/HMCPE) is enhanced by the higher interrupting ratings and current limiting characteristics designed into the line. These devices are available from 3 – 600 amperes in 63, 100, 150, 250, 400 and 600 A frame sizes. Electronic Trip Breakers Cutler-Hammer electronic trip breakers are generally applied for applications where high levels of system coordination are called for. Available from 70 through 2500 amperes, today’s electronic trip breakers can provide superior protection and coordination as well as system alarms and diagnostics, monitoring and communications. Molded Case Switches Cutler-Hammer molded case switches are UL 1087 devices that have no thermal protection but do have a self protecting high magnetic trip setting. Molded case switches are applied when a compact high capacity disconnect device is called for. Accessories that can be installed in molded case circuit breakers are also available for molded case switches. The most common application for a molded case switch would be as a main disconnect for a panelboard or a loadcenter. Available from 100 through 2500 amperes, molded case switches provide a compact disconnect device along with the added benefits of a molded case circuit breaker without the thermal protection. The motor circuit protectors are designed for application in individual motor circuits in combination motor starter units. Motor circuit protectors operate on the magnetic principle with a current sensing element in each pole to provide short circuit protection. The motor circuit protector design permits the most effective protection possible against low-level faults while offering circuit breaker convenience, quick-make quick-break action, deadfront safety, and prevention of single phasing. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Cutler-Hammer Earth Leakage Breakers offer Class 1 ground fault protection and improved ground fault coordination capability. A Class 1 device can open at high levels of fault current, while a Class 2 device prevents opening beyond the contact rating of its interrupting device. Earth Leakage Breakers are factory supplied with a single sensor and ground fault relay built-in. The ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from 0.03 to 30 amperes in eight steps, and the ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds. 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers General Description 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0600 Current Limiting Circuit Breakers Current Limit-R Breakers TRI-PAC Breakers Eaton offers one of the most complete lines of both fusible and non-fused current limiting breakers in the industry. The industrial breakers are available in current limiting versions with interrupting capacities up to 100 kA at 480 V without fuses in the same physical size as standard and high interrupting capacity breakers. Eaton also manufactures both fused and non-fused current limiting devices with interrupting capacities up to 200 kA at 600 Vac. The Current Limit-R molded case circuit breaker was developed with interrupting ratings up to 200,000 amperes at 480 Vac to provide complete system protection against faults, including: The current limiting breakers utilize a reverse loop stationary contact. When current is flowing through the contacts of these breakers, the positions of the reverse loop and moving contact arm induce opposing magnetic fields. The resulting flux lines cause rapid contact blow-apart under these conditions, resulting in very high interrupting capacities and provide current limiting characteristics. 3. High-level short circuits, by using ultra high-speed, blow-apart, current limiting contacts. The increase in demand for electrical power in modern commercial and industrial buildings has resulted in electrical services becoming substantially larger. In some low voltage distribution systems, available short circuit currents can exceed 100,000 symmetrical rms amperes. Fault currents of this intensity may exceed the interrupting ratings of molded case breakers. As a result, larger expensive circuit interrupting devices which could withstand the thermal and magnetic stresses associated with currents of this value have had to be used. High interrupting capacity current limiting devices have been developed which will restrict short circuit current. If applied correctly, they may be used in conjunction with the molded case circuit breakers to provide adequate and economical protection. Current limiting breakers are available from 15 through 2500 amperes and have an interrupting rating of 100 kA at 480 V. These breakers are most commonly applied when very high (up to 100 kA) fault levels are available and in series rating applications where the current limiting capability of these breakers are used upstream in series combinations. Circuit breakers 600 amperes and below which are current limiting have frame catalog numbers which end with the letter “C.” For example, the F-frame model which is current limiting has a catalog number FDC. In accordance with UL circuit breaker marking requirements, the nameplate on the breaker is also labeled “current limiting.” 1. Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics. 2. Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics. Current Limit-R circuit breakers can be used in series with Cutler-Hammer standard molded case circuit breakers with listed interrupting ratings as low as 10,000 amperes in systems capable of delivering fault currents as high as 200,000 amperes. The excellent current limiting properties of the Current Limit-R breakers completely protect all Cutler-Hammer downstream series circuit breakers applied within their voltage ratings. The high level current-limiting action is achieved by the use of special design, blow-apart contacts. The opening speed of the contacts is amplified by the repulsion force in the patented slot motor to effectively separate the contacts under high level fault conditions in less than one millisecond. The rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system, thus limiting the amount of the otherwise available fault current. The Current Limit-R current limiting circuit breakers incorporate all the advantages and features of conventional molded case circuit breakers. They are available in 2- and 3-pole versions in two physical frame sizes and three continuous current frame ratings. The Type FCL has a maximum continuous current frame rating of 100 amperes. It is equipped with a conventional, noninterchangeable, thermal-magnetic-type trip unit with individual ampere ratings. The Type LCL is available with frames having maximum continuous current ratings of either 250 or 400 amperes. Overload and low level short circuit protection is provided by a SELTRONIC electronic trip unit which uses the individual rating plug concept for determining the continuous rating of the breaker. Rating plugs are available with either fixed or adjustable ampere ratings. The TRI-PAC breaker was developed for this application and so named because it affords TRIple-PACkage protection with (1) time delay thermal trip, (2) instantaneous magnetic trip and (3) current limiting protection, combined and coordinated in a compact and economical device. These protective actions are so coordinated that overcurrents and low magnitude faults are cleared by the thermal action; normal short circuits are cleared by the magnetic action; and abnormal short circuits, above an established value, are cleared by the current limiting device. Thus, unless a severe short circuit occurs, the current limiter is unaffected and its replacement is held to a minimum. TRI-PAC breakers are available in ratings from 15 through 1600 amperes and have a UL listed interrupting capacity of 200,000 amperes at up to 600 Vac and also have an interrupting capacity of 100,000 amperes at up to 250 Vdc. The TRI-PAC breaker offers all of the advantages of the economical molded case breaker and the current limiter is retained, while the disadvantages of separately mounted devices are eliminated. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0601 Home TOC << >> Index Special Application Breakers Eaton offers a wide range of special application molded case circuit breakers. Special application breakers are breakers built with special features to meet the unique requirements of the special application as follows. See the application data section for further information. Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers General Description Eaton offers 125 Vac AFCI single-pole, 15 and 20 ampere breakers, plug-in and bolt-on, to meet Article 210-12 of the 2002 NEC. Lighting and Industrial Breakers Breakers are available for use with ungrounded applications where all three poles are connected in series. Rated for up to 600 Vdc, breakers are available from 15 – 2500 ampere trip ranges with thermal magnetic trip units or special low magnetic only trip devices. Their compact size and increased interrupting performance give Eaton the most complete range of dc breakers in the industry. Recognizing the growing need for high interrupting requirements on 240V applications such as loadcenters, metercenters, metering switchboards, distribution switchboards and panelboards, etc., the Cutler-Hammer family of lighting and industrial circuit breakers is designed to meet all applications. The Cutler-Hammer family of QUICKLAG miniature circuit breakers is available in bolt-on, plug-in and cable-in cable-out configurations. For molded case circuit breakers, Eaton offers the GB/GC design up through 100 amperes and the ED/EDH/EDC design up through 225 amperes up to 200 kA at 240 volts. Mining Breakers HACR Listed Circuit Breakers DC Rated Breakers Cutler-Hammer Mining Circuit Breakers have a tradition of proven dependability and reliability in harsh mine environments, consistently combining strength and reliability with safe, efficient operation. The E2G mining breaker is available in 225 and 400 ampere frames and is designed for trailing cable applications per MSHA 30 CFR 75. With interrupting ratings of 14 kA at 1000/577 Vac and rms sensing electronic trip unit, the E2G mining breaker can be applied to all mining circuit breaker applications. HACR listed circuit breakers are circuit breakers that have been tested per UL for use in heating, air conditioning and refrigeration applications. HACR type circuit breakers are typically applied as the protection device for multimotor or combination loads in a group installation configuration. Eaton has its family of QUICKLAG QC miniature breakers and Series C molded case breaker frames G, F, J and K listed for HACR applications. Navy/Marine Circuit Breakers Engine generator circuit breakers are designed specifically for application on diesel engine powered standby generator systems. Generator breakers are equipped with a special trip unit that provides standard overload protection with low magnetic short circuit protection to suit generator applications that call for close short circuit protection at low interrupting ratings. Molded Case Navy Circuit Breakers provide both overload protection for conductors and short circuit protection for all circuit elements such as conductors, motors and starters. They also serve as manual disconnecting means as well as circuit protectors. All Cutler-Hammer Navy breakers meet applicable Navy/ Marine specifications for “hi-shock” and “vibration” requirements. These manually operated breakers are rated from 5 to1600 amperes with interrupting ratings from 1500 to 100,000 amperes. AFCI Circuit Breakers An arc-fault circuit interrupter is a device intended to provide protection from the effects of arc faults by recognizing characteristics unique to arcing and by functioning to de-energize the circuit when an arc fault is detected. 21.3-5 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Eaton offers a family of engine generator circuit breakers in six frames from 15 to 1200 amperes that conform to UL, CSA and IEC standards. 100% Rated Circuit Breakers 100% rated circuit breakers are tested inside a minimum size enclosure to UL 489 for application at 100% of the breakers continuous current rating. 100% rated circuit breakers are equipped with electronic trip units and applied with 90ºC cable rated at 75ºC ampacity. To apply 100% rated breakers in switchboards and panelboards, additional tests are required to meet UL 67 and UL 891. Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breaker frames K-, L-, Nand R-, 70 through 2000 amperes can be applied at 100% of their rated continuous current as long as the breaker is installed in its minimum size enclosure including ventilation. 100% rated breakers are applied to distribution system to provide installation cost savings. The amount of savings that can be realized is dependent on the application. Series Rating Circuit Breakers Series rating is a short circuit interrupting rating assigned to a combi-nation of two or more overcurrent devices connected in series. The short circuit interrupting rating of the upstream device must be equal to or greater than the available fault current. Downstream breakers, however, are not fully rated for the system’s available fault current. Series combinations must be tested to UL 489. Series ratings are applied to distribution systems where short circuit coordination is not required. The CutlerHammer listing of available series rating combinations are shown in the applications section of this document. World Standard Circuit Breakers (IEC 947-2) Molded case circuit breakers meet all major electrical standards of the world. There are two branches of the family tree. One meets applicable UL, NEMA, CSA and IEC standards and employs a fixed thermal and fixed or adjustable magnetic trip. The second meets IEC 947-2 and has been assigned ultimate and service interrupting ratings, and employs adjustable thermal and adjustable magnetic trips. The frame ratings of both types of breakers are physically interchangeable with each other. Eaton is the first manufacturer in the industry to have a true family of world circuit breakers. Standards Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers. ■ National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Publication Number AB1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers. ■ Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures, including Marine Circuit Breakers File E7819. ■ Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 1087, Molded Case Switches. ■ 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home General Description 20 Time-Current Trip Curve Characteristics Because of this allowed spread, users should not specify exact tripping times. 21 Time-current trip curve characteristics are available in the Molded Case Circuit Breaker CD-ROM (available on request) and on the Eaton Web site. The upper left portions of these curves show the inverse time delay tripping of the breakers due to thermal action. The lower right segments for these curves portray the magnetic tripping action of the breakers. In the case of the front adjustable thermal-magnetic breakers, the magnetic tripping elements may be adjusted to trip at values within a specific current range. This adjustment is shown their respective characteristic tripping curves. When these breakers leave the factory, their magnetic trip elements are set at the high side of their tripping range. Adjustment downward may be made to fit the requirements of the installation. Currents equal to or greater than these 22 23 24 25 26 27 The band curves shown for each breaker type represent current tripping limits for the breaker and are within limits established by Underwriters Laboratories. For a given current, at rated ambient, a breaker will clear the circuit automatically at some total time within the two extreme values defined by “maximum” and “minimum” curves. For example, a 1-pole, 15-ampere QUICKLAG would trip in no less than 10 seconds and in no more than 150 seconds on a 30-ampere current. 10000 10000 5000 5000 1000 1000 500 500 TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0602 magnetic settings will cause instant tripping. Curves can be family curves and are suitable for most applications; for more accurate applications, a detailed curve of the particular type and ampere rating of the breaker should be requested. The total time taken by a breaker to clear a fault consists of the mechanical operating time plus the time of actual current interruption. Characteristic time/current curves show total clearing times. Magnetic only breakers have no time delay in tripping. The tripping characteristics of these breakers are similar to the right-hand portion of the standard breakers, except with the vertical lines extended to the top of the curve. AMPERE RATING A OR LONG TIME PICK-UP 28 29 TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT CURVE TA A F LT FAUL UNIT WITH ADJUSTABLE T MAXIMUM 30 31 32 33 34 LONG TIME PORTION 100 T I M E LONG TIME DELAY A 100 T I M E 50 50 T I M E MINIMUM I N I N 10 S E C O N D S I N 10 S E C O N D S 5 5 SHORT TIME PICK-UP 1 1 .5 .5 I2t RAMP SHORT TIME DELAY A .1 37 4 3 GROUND F FAUL LT PICK-UP 2 2 I t RAMP 1 .8 .6 GROUND FAUL F LT TIME DELAY A .4 .3 .2 .1 .08 .06 .04 .03 .2 .3 .4 35 36 S E C O N D S 10 8 6 FRAME OR SENSOR RATING A .1 .05 .6 .8 1 2 3 4 6 8 A LT PICK-UP AUL INSTANT T TANEOUS PICK-UP .05 INSTANTANEOUS PORTION .01 .01 .5 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000 CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING .5 1 5 10 50 100 500 1000 CURRENT IN MULTIPLES L OF RA ATING PLUG OR CURRENT SENSOR 5000 10000 38 39 40 Non-Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic Molded Case Circuit Breakers Solid-State Trip Unit with Adjustable Phase and Ground Current Settings Figure 21.3-1. Typical Time-Current Curves For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0603 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-7 Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings Table 21.3-1. Circuit Breaker Frame Reference Guide Frame Nominal Size Amperes Q or B 20 Circuit Breaker Types 5 – 125 HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW, QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP, BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW, QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP, QC, QCD, QCF, QCR, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW, QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP 21 22 G E EG F 15 – 100 100 – 225 15 – 125 15 – 150 GHB, HGHB, GHBS, GHC, HGHC, GD ED, EDH, EDC, EHD (100 ampere) EGB, EGE, EGS, EGH FDB, FD, HFD, FDC JG J K L LG 63 – 250 70 – 250 70 – 400 300 – 600 100 – 600 JGE, JGS, JGH JDB, JD, HJD, JDC KDB, KD, CKD, HKD, CHKD, KDC LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC LGE, LGS, LGH, LGC 23 M N R 400 – 800 600 – 1200 800 – 2500 MDLB, MDL, CMDL, HMDLB, HMDL, CHMDL ND, CND, HND, CHND, NDC, CNDC RD, CRD, RDC, CRDC 24 Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers Circuit Continuous Breaker Ampere Type Rating at 40°C No. of Poles Volts ac dc Type Federal UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) of Specification ac Ratings Volts dc Trip W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 25 250 125/250 — — — — — — — 14,000 — 14,000 — — — — — — 26 G-Frame GHB GHB GHB GHB HGHB GQ 15 – 100 15 – 100 15 – 100 15 – 100 15 – 30 15 – 20 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 1 120 240 277 277/480 277 277 125 N.I.T. 125/250 125 125/250 125 — 11a 65,000 10b, 11b, — 12b, 14b, — 15b — 12c, 13a, 13b 65,000 65,000 GHBS GBHS 15 – 30 15 – 20 1, 2 1, 2 277/480 347/600 — — — — 65,000 65,000 — — GD GD 15 – 50 15 – 100 2 3 480 480 125/250 N.I.T. 250 N.I.T. 13b 13b — — — — GHC GHC GHC GHC HGHC 15 – 100 15 – 100 15 – 100 15 – 100 15 – 30 1 2, 3 1 2, 3 1 120 240 277 277/480 277 125 N.I.T. 125/250 125 125/250 125 12c, 13a 13b 12c, 13a 13b 65,000 — — — 65,000 — — — — — EGB 15 – 125 1 277 2, 3, 4 480 250 — — 35,000 — — — EGE 15 – 125 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 250 N.I.T. — — EGS 15 – 125 1 347 250 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 N.I.T. N.I.T. — — 100,000 — — — 85,000 35,000 85,000 — — — 35,000 — — 35,000 22,000 — 35,000 — EGH 15 – 125 1 347 250 2, 3, 4 600Y/347 N.I.T. — — 200,000 — — — 100,000 65,000 100,000 — — — 42,000 — — 65,000 25,000 — 42,000 — 100 – 225 100 – 225 100 – 225 100 – 225 100 – 225 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 240 240 240 240 240 125 125 125 125 125 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. — — 12b 12b 12b 14b 1 — — — — — — — — — — 22,000 42,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 — — — — — EHD EHD 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2, 3 277 480 125 250 N.I.T. 13a 13b — — — — — 14,000 18,000 — FDB FDB 15 – 150 15 – 150 2, 3 4 600 600 250 250 N.I.T. 18a — — — — 18,000 — 18,000 — FD FD FD 15 – 225 15 – 225 15 – 225 1 2, 3 4 277 600 600 125 250 250 N.I.T. 13a 22a — — — — — — — 35,000 65,000 — 65,000 — — — 10,000 — — 35,000 18,000 — 10,000 — 35,000 18,000 — 10,000 — 37 HFD HFD HFD 15 – 225 15 – 225 15 – 225 1 2,3 4 277 600 600 125 250 250 N.I.T. 13a 22a — — — — — — — 65,000 100,000 — 100,000 — — — 10,000 — — 65,000 25,000 — 22,000 — 65,000 25,000 — 22,000 — 38 FDC FDC 15 – 225 15 – 225 2, 3 4 600 600 250 250 N.I.T. 24a — — — — 200,000 — 200,000 — 100,000 35,000 — 100,000 35,000 — — N.I.T. — — — — — — — 65,000 — — — — — — 14,000 14,000 25,000 14,000 — — — 14,000 — — — — — — — — — — 14,000 — — — — — 10,000 — 65,000 — 65,000 — — 65,000 — — — — — 14,000 14,000 25,000 14,000 — 22,000 — — — — 14,000 — — — — — — 14,000 — 14,000 — 14,000 — — — — 10,000 10,000 — 14,000 — 14,000 — 14,000 — — — — — — 14,000 — 14,000 — EG Frame N.I.T. — 25,000 18,000 25,000 — 35,000 — — — 18,000 — 10,000 — — — 10,000 — 25,000 18,000 10,000 10,000 — 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 F-Frame EDB EDS ED EDH EDC N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting. Current limiting. Not defined in W-C-375b. CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com — — — — — — — — — — — — 14,000 — 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 — — — — — — — — — — 34 35 10,000 — — — 10,000 — 14,000 14,000 — 14,000 14,000 — 10,000 — 10,000 — 36 22,000 — 22,000 — 39 40 21.3-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0604 Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued) 20 21 22 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles Volts ac dc Federal Type Specification of Trip W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) dc ac Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250 25,000 35,000 65,000 18,000 18,000 25,000 — — — 10,000 — 22,000 — 22,000 — 35,000 35,000 65,000 100,000 18,000 18,000 25,000 35,000 — — — — 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 JG Frame JGE JGS JGH 63 – 250 63 – 250 63 – 250 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. — — — — — — — — — 65,000 — 85,000 — 100,000 — 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 600 600 600 600 22a 22a 22a 22a — — — — — — — — 65,000 65,000 100,000 200,000 J-Frame 23 24 25 26 27 JDB JD HJD JDC 70 – 250 70 – 250 70 – 250 70 – 250 250 250 250 250 N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. — — — — — — — — K-Frame DK 250 – 400 2, 3 240 250 N.I.T. 14b — — 65,000 — — — — 10,000 — KDB KD 100 – 400 100 – 400 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T. 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a 23a — — — — 65,000 65,000 — — 35,000 35,000 25,000 25,000 — — 10,000 — 10,000 — CKD 100 – 400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a — — 65,000 — 35,000 25,000 — 10,000 — HKD 100 – 400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a — — 100,000 — 65,000 35,000 — 22,000 — CHKD 100 – 400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a — — 100,000 — 65,000 35,000 — 22,000 — KDC 100 – 400 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a — — 200,000 — 100,000 50,000 — 22,000 — 23a 23a 23a 23a — — — — — — — — 65,000 85,000 100,000 200,000 — — — — 35,000 50,000 65,000 100,000 18,000 25,000 35,000 50,000 — — — — 22,000 22,000 42,000 42,000 65,000 65,000 — — 35,000 35,000 25,000 25,000 — — 22,000 — 22,000 — 35,000 65,000 25,000 35,000 — — 22,000 — 25,000 — L-Frame 28 LGE LGS LGH LGC 100 – 600 100 – 600 100 – 600 100 – 600 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 29 LDB LD 300 – 600 300 – 600 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T. 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a 23a — — — — CLD HLD 300 – 600 300 – 600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a 23a — — — — 65,000 — 100,000 — CHLD LDC 300 – 600 300 – 600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a 23a — — — — 100,000 — — 65,000 35,000 100,000 50,000 — — 25,000 — 25,000 — CLDC 300 – 600 2, 3, 4 600 250 I.T. 23a — — 200,000 — 100,000 50,000 — 25,000 — 300 – 800 300 – 800 300 – 800 300 – 800 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 600 600 600 600 250 250 250 250 I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. 23a 23a 23a 23a — — — — — — — — 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 — — — — 50,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 — — — — 22,000 22,000 25,000 25,000 — — — — 600 – 1200 600 – 1200 600 – 1200 600 – 1200 600 – 1200 600 – 1200 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 600 600 600 600 600 600 — — — — — — N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 23A 23A 23A 23A 23A 23A — — — — — — — — — — — — 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 — — — — — — 50,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 50,000 50,000 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 800 – 1600 800 – 1600 1000 – 2000 1000 – 2500 1000 – 2000 800 – 1600 800 – 1600 1000 – 2000 1000 – 2500 1000 – 2000 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 — — — — — — — — — — N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 24a 24a 24a 24a 24a 25a 25a 25a 25a 25a — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 125,000 125,000 125,000 200,000 125,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 — — — — — — — — — — 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 30 31 600 600 600 600 250 250 250 250 I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. — — — — M-Frame 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 MDL CMDL HMDL CHMDL N-Frame ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC R-Frame RD 1600 CRD 1600 RD 2000 RD 2500 CRD 2000 RDC 1600 CRDC 1600 RDC 2000 RDC 2500 CRDC 2000 39 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 65,000 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. Not presently available for panelboard or switchboard mounting. Current limiting. 100% rated. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0605 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-9 Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings Table 21.3-2. Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C No. of Poles Volts ac Type Federal of Specification Trip W-C-375b dc 20 UL Listed Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) dc ac Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250 Current Limit-R Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Non-Fused Type FCL LCL 15 – 100 125 – 400 2, 3 2, 3 480 — 600 — N.I.T. N.I.T. — — — — — — 200,000 — 200,000 — 150,000 — — 200,000 100,000 — — — — — N.I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. 16a, 16b, 17a, 26a 16a, 16b, 17a, 26a 16b, 17a, 26a 17a, 26a — — — — — — — — 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 — — — — 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 TRI-PAC Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Fused Type FB LA NB PB 15 – 100 70 – 400 300 – 800 600 – 1600 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 600 600 600 600 250 250 250 250 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc. — — — — 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 — — — — 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0606 QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Table 21.3-3. Plug-in, Bolt-on, Cable-in/Cable-out Circuit Breaker Type HQP HQP HQP QPHW QPHW QPHW Circuit Breaker Type Code P P QHPX QHPX QHPX P QHPW QHPW QHPW P QPGF QPGF QPHGF QPHGF QPGFEP QPGFEP QPHGFEP QPHGFEP BAB BAB BAB P, GF P, GF P, GFEP P, GFEP B BABR, BABRS BABR, BABRS QBHW QBHW QBHW B B B HBAX HBAX HBAX B HBAW HBAW HBAW B 32 TOC Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Number of Poles Volts ac dc Federal Specification W-C-375b Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) dc ac Ratings Volts 120 120/240 240 24 – 48 62.5 80 — 5,000 — 10 – 70 10 – 125 10 – 100 15 – 70 15 – 125 15 – 100 1 2 2, 3 1 2 2, 3 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 12a 10b, 11b, 12b 14a 14a 14b — — — — — — 10,000 10,000 — 22,000 22,000 — — — 10,000 — — 22,000 5,000 5,000 — 5,000 5,000 — 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — — — — — — — 42,000 42,000 — — — 42,000 5,000 5,000 — 15 – 30 15 – 30 15 – 20 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 15a 15a 15b — — — 65,000 65,000 — — — 65,000 5,000 5,000 — 15 – 40 15 – 50 15 – 30 15 – 50 15 – 40 15 – 50 15 – 30 15 – 30 10 – 70 10 – 125 10 – 100 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2, 3 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 — — — — — — — — 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a — — — — 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 12a 10b, 11b, 12b 10,000 — 22,000 — 10,000 — 22,000 22,000 — — — — 10,000 — 22,000 — 10,000 — 22,000 10,000 10,000 — — — — — — — — — — — 10,000 — — — — — — — — 5,000 5,000 — 15 – 30 15 – 30 15 – 70 15 – 125 15 – 100 1 2 1 2 2, 3 120 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 — — 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — — — 14a 14a 14b — — — — — 10,000 10,000 22,000 22,000 — — — — — 22,000 — — 5,000 5,000 — 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 —. — — — — — — 42,000 42,000 — — — 42,000 5,000 5,000 — 15 – 30 15 – 30 15 – 20 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 15a 15a 15b — — — 65,000 65,000 — — — 65,000 5,000 5,000 — 5,000 — 5,000 — 5,000 — 5,000 — — — — — — — — — 5,000 — — — 5,000 — 5,000 — 5,000 — — 5,000 — — 5,000 — — 5,000 — — — — — — — — — — 5,000 — — — — 5,000 — — 5,000 — — 5,000 — QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for application in relative humidity 0 – 95% noncondensing. Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on 2 poles connected in series. 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10 – 50 amperes and 2500 AIC 55 – 100 amperes continuous. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0607 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-11 Circuit Breaker Selection Guide and Interrupting Ratings Table 21.3-3. Plug-in, Bolt-on, Cable-in/Cable-out (Continued) Circuit Breaker Type Circuit Breaker Type Code Continuous Ampere Rating at 40°C Number of Poles Volts ac dc Federal Specification W-C-375b 120 120/240 240 24 – 48 62.5 80 QBGF QBGF B, GF 15 – 40 15 – 50 1 2 120 120/240 — — 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 10,000 — — 10,000 — — — — — — — — QBHGF QBHGF B, GF 15 – 30 15 – 30 1 2 120 120/240 — — 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 11a, 12a 22,000 — — 22,000 — — — — — — — — QBGFEP QBGFEP B, GFEP 15 – 40 15 – 50 1 2 120 120/240 — — — — 10,000 — — 10,000 — — — — — — — — QBHGFEP QBHGFEP B, GFEP 15 – 30 15 – 30 1 2 120 120/240 — — — — 22,000 22,000 — 22,000 — — — — — — — — QC QC QC C 10 – 70 10 – 100 10 – 100 1 2 2, 3, 4 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 10a, 11a, 12a 10a, 12a 10b, 11b, 12b — — — 10,000 10,000 — — — 10,000 5,000 5,000 — 5,000 — — 5,000 — QCD QCD QCD C 10 – 100 10 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 3 120 120/240 240 — — — — — — — — — 10,000 10,000 — — — 10,000 — — — — — — — — — QCF QCF QCF QCR QCR QCR C 10 – 60 15 – 20 15 – 30 10 – 60 15 – 20 15 – 30 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 120/240 120/240 240 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 62.5 — — — — — — 10,000 22,000 — 10,000 22,000 — 10,000 — 10,000 10,000 — 10,000 — — — — — — 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 — — — — — — QCHW QCHW QCHW C 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 2, 3 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 14a 14a 14b — — — 22,000 22,000 — — — 22,000 5,000 5,000 — QHCX QHCX QHCX C 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — — — — — — — 42,000 42,000 — — — 42,000 5,000 5,000 — QHCW QHCW QHCW C 15 – 30 15 – 30 15 – 20 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 24, 48, 62.5 24, 48, 80 — 15a 15a 15b — — — 65,000 65,000 — — — 65,000 5,000 5,000 — QCGF QCGF C, GF 15 – 40 15 – 50 1 2 120 120/240 — — — — 10,000 — — 10,000 — — QCHGF QCHGF C, GF 15 – 30 15 – 30 1 2 120 120/240 — — — — 22,000 — — 22,000 QCGFEP QCGFEP C, GFEP 15 – 40 15 – 50 1 2 120 120/240 — — — — 10,000 — QCHGFEP QCHGFEP C, GFEP 15 – 30 15 – 30 1 2 120 120/240 — — — — 22,000 — Interrupting Ratings (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on 2 poles connected in series. 62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10 – 50 amperes and 2500 AIC 55 – 100 amperes continuous. 20 dc ac Ratings Volts 3,000 3,000 2,000 3,000 3,000 5,000 — — 5,000 — 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 — 5,000 — 28 5,000 — — 5,000 — 29 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 10,000 — — — — — — — — — 22,000 — — — — — — — — 5,000 — 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-12 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers 20 January 2005 Sheet 0608 QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 21 22 HQP, QPHW, QHPX 23 QHPW QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP BAB, QBHW, HBAX HBAW Table 21.3-4. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 24 Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections Plug-on 25 Bolt-on Thermal-Magnetic HQP, QPHW, QHPX Thermal-Magnetic QHPW Thermal-Magnetic QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP Thermal-Magnetic BAB, QBHW, HBAX Thermal-Magnetic HBAW Circuit Breaker Ratings — Continuous Current Rating at 40°C and 0 – 95% Humidity (Noncondensing) 26 Amperes Poles Volts HQP 27 5 – 70 10 – 150 10 – 100 Amperes Poles Volts QHPW 15 – 30 15 – 20 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 1-2 3 120/240 240 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 15 – 30 15 – 30 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 15 – 40 15 – 50 QPHW 28 29 15 – 70 15 – 125 15 – 100 15 – 40 15 – 50 1 2 120 120/240 5 – 70 10 – 150 10 – 100 1 2 120 120/240 15 – 70 15 – 125 15 – 100 1 2 120 120/240 Poles Volts 1 2 120 120/240 W H D 1.00 (25.4) 3.19 2.38 (81.0) (60.3) Amperes Poles Volts HBAW 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 3 120/240 120/240 240 W H D 1.00 (25.4) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) 15 – 30 15 – 20 1-2 3 120/240 240 W H D 1.00 (25.4) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) QBHW HBAX QPHGFEP 15 – 30 15 – 30 32 Amperes BAB QPGFEP 30 31 Poles Volts QPHGF QHPX 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 Amperes QPGF Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker W H 1.00 (25.4) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) D W H 1.00 (25.4) 2.94 2.38 (74.6) (60.3) D ac Interrupting Ratings — UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes) 33 Volts Amps I.R. Volts HQP 120/240, 240 34 Amps I.R. Volts QHPW 10,000 Amps I.R. Volts QPGF, QPGFEP 120/240, 240 65,000 QPHW 120, 120/240 10,000 QPHGF, QPHGFEP 120/240, 240 22,000 120, 120/240 36 37 38 39 Amps I.R. HBAW 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 65,000 QBHW 22,000 QHPX 35 Amps I.R. Volts BAB 120/240, 240 22,000 HBAX 120/240, 240 42,000 120/240, 240 42,000 dc Interrupting Ratings Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts Poles Amps I.R. 48 62.5 80 1-2 1 2 1-2 1 2 — — — 1-2 1 2 1-2 1 2 5,000 2,500 5,000 48 62.5 80 5,000 2,500 5,000 — — — — — — 48 62.5 80 5,000 2,500 5,000 48 62.5 80 5,000 2,500 5,000 Accessories and Modifications — See MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Shunt Trip Special Calibration Shock Tested Dummy Breaker Optional Terminals Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Shunt Trip Special Calibration Shock Tested Dummy Breaker Optional Terminals Moisture-Fungus Treatment Bell Alarm Contacts Auxiliary Switch Contacts Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Shunt Trip Special Calibration Shock Tested Panelboard Accessories Dummy Breaker Optional Terminals Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Shunt Trip Special Calibration Shock Tested Panelboard Accessories Optional Terminals Two-pole interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0609 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-13 Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers 20 21 22 QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP QCR,QCF QC, QCHW, QHCX QHCW QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP 23 Table 21.3-5. QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Type of Breaker Mounting/Electrical Connections Bolt-on Cable-in/Cable-out Thermal-Magnetic QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP Thermal-Magnetic QCR, QCF 24 Thermal-Magnetic QC, QCHW, QHCX Thermal-Magnetic QCD Thermal-Magnetic QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP 25 Circuit Breaker Ratings — Continuous Current Rating at 40°C and 0 – 95% Humidity (Noncondensing) Amperes Poles Volts QBGF 15 – 40 15 – 50 — 1 2 — 120 120/240 — Amperes Poles Volts Amperes QCR, QCF QC 10 – 60 10 – 60 15 – 30 1 2 2-3 120 120/240 240 QBHGF 15 – 30 15 – 30 — Poles Volts 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 10 – 100 10 – 100 Amperes Poles Volts QCGF 1-2 3 120/240 240 1 2 — 120 120/240 — 1 2 — 120 120/240 — 1 2 — 120 120/240 — 1 2 120 120/240 W H D 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 2.44 (95.3) (61.9) 15 – 40 15 – 50 — 120/240 120/240 240 15 – 30 15 – 50 — 1 2 2-3 120/240 120/240 240 15 – 30 15 – 50 — 1-2 3 120/240 240 15 – 50 15 – 30 W H D 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 2.44 (95.3) (61.9) 120 120/240 — 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 — 120 120/240 — 15 – 70 15 – 100 15 – 100 1 2 120 120/240 15 – 30 15 – 20 QHCX QCHGFEP Dimensions in Inches (mm) Per Single-Pole Breaker H 1.00 (25.4) 3.19 2.38 (81.0) (60.3) D W H .50 (12.7) 3.94 2.63 (74.6) (66.7) D W H 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 2.63 (95.3) (66.7) D ac Interrupting Ratings — UL Listed Interrupting Ratings Shown (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts Amps I.R. Volts QBGF, QBGFEP 120, 120/240 Amps I.R. Volts QCR, QCF 10,000 10,000 QBHGF, QBHGFEP 120, 120/240 Amps I.R. Volts QC 120/240 Amps I.R. Volts QCD 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240, 240 10,000 120/240 10,000 22,000 120 22,000 QHCX 120/240, 240 — — — 62.5 125 — Poles Amps I.R. Volts 1 2 — 3,000 3,000 — 48 62.5 80 32 33 34 65,000 dc Interrupting Ratings Poles Amps I.R. Volts 31 35 120/240, 240 — — — 30 42,000 QHCW — — — 29 QCHGF, QCHGFEP 120/240, 240 Volts 28 Amps I.R. QCGF, QCGFEP QCHW 22,000 27 QCGFEP QHCW W 26 QCHGF 1 2 2-3 1 2 — QBHGFEP 15 – 30 15 – 30 Amperes QCD QCHW QBGFEP 15 – 40 15 – 50 — 5 – 70 10 – 125 10 – 100 Poles Volts Poles Amps I.R. Volts 1-2 1 2 5,000 2,500 5,000 48 62.5 80 Poles Amps I.R. Volts 1-2 1 2 5,000 2,500 5,000 — — — Poles Amps I.R. — — — — — — 36 37 Accessories and Modifications — See MCCB CD-ROM for Description and UL Installation Status Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Bell Alarm Contacts Auxiliary Switch Contacts Ring Terminals Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices QCR Mounting Clips Ring Terminals Quick Connect Terminals Shunt Trip Shock Tested DIN Rail Mounting Clip Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Shunt Trip Special Calibration Shock Tested Face Mounting Plate Base Mounting Hardware Optional Terminals Dummy Breaker DIN Rail Mounting Clip Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Shunt Trip Special Calibration Shock Tested Face Mounting Plate Base Mounting Hardware Optional Terminals Dummy Breaker DIN Rail Mounting Clip Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on two poles connected in series. Not UL listed. CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com Moisture-Fungus Treatment Handle Lock Devices Bell Alarm Contacts Auxiliary Switch Contacts DIN Rail Mounting Clip 38 39 40 21.3-14 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Selection Data — QUICKLAG Industrial Breakers 20 January 2005 Sheet 0610 Table 21.3-7. Factory Modifications QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbering System Type of Modification Breaker Types Catalog Suffix Shunt Trip (Requires 1 extra pole space on right side) 120, 208, 240 Vac 12, 24, 48 Vac/dc Draws 2.6A at 120 V Draws 11A at 24 Vdc QUICKLAG Types P, B and C QUICKLAG Types P, B and C S S1 Special Calibration (50°C) Shock Testing Freeze Testing QUICKLAG Types P, B and C QUICKLAG Types P, B and C QUICKLAG Types P, B and C V L Y Moisture-Fungus Treatment QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and Ground Fault QUICKLAG Types P, B, C QUICKLAG Types P, B, C QUICKLAG Types P, B, C QUICKLAG Types P, B, C F Table 21.3-6. Catalog Numbering System — QUICKLAG 21 HQP 1 070 V 22 Breaker Type 23 24 25 Poles Amperes Modification Suffix 1 = 1-Pole 120/240 Vac 2 = 2-Poles 120/240 Vac 240 Vac – use suffix H 3 = 3-Poles 240 Vac – use suffix H S S1 V L Y F H Marine Duty Naval Duty 400 Hz Calibration Specific dc Ratings (Breaker marked with a Maximum Vdc rating) 26 H08 H09 G Q thru Q9 Contact the Eaton factory for modifications available for QCR and QCF breakers. Table 21.3-8. Factory Installed Breaker Terminals Breaker Type Continuous Standard Line Terminal Ampere Term Wire Wire Rating Type Type Range (AWG) Term Type Wire Type Wire Range (AWG) Line Load QUICKLAG Type P HQP, QPHW, QHPX, QHPW 10 to 30 35 to 50 55 to 125 Plug-on female clips which mate with the bus stabs 1 2 3 Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 4 14 – 4 8 – 1/0 N/A 3 3 — QUICKLAG Ground Fault QPGF, QPHGF, QPGFEP, QPHGFEP 10 to 30 Plug-on female clips which mate with the bus stabs 1 (1-pole) 4 (2-pole) 4 Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu 14 – 4 14 – 8 14 – 8 N/A 3 3 — 10 to 30 35 to 50 55 to 125 Extended tangs which bolt directly to the bus 1 (1- and 2-pole) 2 (3-pole) 3 Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 4 14 – 4 8 – 1/0 N/A 30 QUICKLAG Type B BAB, QBHW, HBAX, HBAW 3 3 — 10 to 30 Extended tangs which bolt directly to the bus 1 (1-pole) 4 (2-pole) 4 Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu 14 – 4 14 – 8 14 – 8 N/A N/A 31 QUICKLAG Ground Fault QBGF, QBHGF, QBGFEP, QBHGFEP QUICKLAG Type C QC, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW 10 to 20 25 to 60 70 to 100 5 6 7 Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 10 14 – 10 14 – 10 5 2 3 Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 10 14 – 4 8 – 1/0 6, 7 5, 7 5 6, 7, 8 5, 6, 7, 8 5, 7, 8 QUICKLAG QCR, QCF 10 to 55 60 1 1 Cu/Al Cu 14 – 4 14 – 4 1 1 Cu/Al Cu 14 – 4 14 – 4 N/A N/A QUICKLAG Ground Fault 10 to 20 QCGF, QCHGF, QCGFEP, QCHGFEP 25 to 50 5 6 Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 10 14 – 10 1 1 Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 4 14 – 4 6, 7 5, 7 5 5 27 28 29 32 33 34 1 40 40 2 Standard Load Terminal 3 Optional Terminals 4 35 Steel Box Lug 36 5 6 37 38 Steel Ring Type Steel Box Lug Steel Box Lug 7 Aluminum Box Lug Aluminum Box Lug 8 Aluminum Box Lug 4-Prong Quick Connect Catalog Suffix P Clamp on line side only. 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0611 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index Types BABR and BABRS Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled 21.3-15 Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated Product Features ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Bolt-on line-side terminal. Cable connected load-side terminal. 3- or 4-wire (BABR) control terminal. Status switch. Bi-metal assembly for thermal overload protection. Fast acting short circuit protection. Arc-runner and arc-chute assembly for fast acting arc extinction. Three-position handle: OFF, TRIP (Center), ON. Handle permits manual switching when control power is lost. ■ Mechanical trip indicator. ■ 15 and 20 ampere breakers SWD (switching duty) rated. ■ HID ratings for HID (high intensity discharge) lighting. ■ Note: For use in lighting control applications, see Pow-R-Command Section 28. Table 21.3-9. BABR and BABRS UL 489 and CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings and Catalog Numbers Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles BABR1015, BABRS1015 BABR1020, BABRS1020 BABR1025, BABRS1025 BABR1030, BABRS1030 BABR2015, BABRS2015 BABR2020, BABRS2020 BABR2025, BABRS2025 BABR2030, BABRS2030 20 21 22 23 24 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 120 120/240 1 1 1 1 15 20 25 30 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 — — — — 2 2 2 2 15 20 25 30 — — — — 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 25 26 27 28 Continuous current rating at 40°C. Table 21.3-10. BABR Wire Harness BABR Breaker Description BABR and BABRS circuit breakers are bolt-on branch circuit breakers designed for use in panelboards and are ideally suited for lighting control or energy management applications. In addition to providing conventional branch circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated mechanism that provides for efficient breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation when used with a suitable controller like the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Pow-RCommand lighting control system. BABR and BABRS breakers can also be operated by pushbuttons, relays or PLCs. A breaker status feature is included on the BABRS version. Description Catalog Number This 60-inch (1219.2 mm) wire pigtail provides a connection from a single BABR or BABRS control plug to a customer’s pushbutton, relay or PLC. Each box contains 12 pigtails. Wires are 22 AWG, 600 V. Order in multiples of 12. SLBKRPTL1 Same as SLBKRPTL1 except 72 inches (1828.8 mm) long and connects up to four SLBKRPTL4 BABR or BABRS breakers on the same pigtail. Each box contains 4 pigtails. Order in multiples of 4. Same as SLBKRPTL4 except it connects up to six BABR or BABRS breakers on the same pigtail. Each box contains 4 pigtails. Order in multiples of 4. 29 30 31 SLBKRPTL6 32 33 34 35 36 37 Note: The BABR breaker has monitoring only of the status of the remote controlled contact, while the BABRS has monitoring only of the status of the breaker contacts. 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-16 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated 20 Types GHBS and GBHS Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled 22 23 1-Pole 2-Pole Description GHBS and GBHS circuit breakers are bolt-on branch circuit breakers designed for use in panelboards and are ideally suited for lighting control or energy management applications. In addition to providing conventional branch circuit protection, they include a unique solenoid-operated mechanism that provides for efficient breaker pulse-on and pulse-off operation when used with a suitable controller like the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Command lighting control system. Table 21.3-11. GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles GHBS1015D GHBS1020D GHBS1030D GHBS2015D GHBS2020D GHBS2030D 32 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 120 240 277/480 1 1 1 15 20 30 65,000 65,000 65,000 — — — 14,000 14,000 14,000 2 2 2 15 20 30 — — — 65,000 65,000 65,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 30 31 Sheet 0612 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Ampere Rating Volts ac (50/60 Hz) GBHS1015D GBHS1020D 1 1 15 20 10,000 10,000 GBHS2015D GBHS2020D 2 2 15 20 10,000 10,000 347/600 Continuous current rating at 40°C. Table 21.3-13. Terminal Type 25 29 >> Number of Poles Item Circuit Breaker Amperes Terminal Type Screw Head Type Wire Type AWG Wire Range GHBS GBHS GHBS 15 – 20 15 – 20 30 Clamp Clamp Box Slotted Slotted Slotted Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 10 14 – 10 14 – 2 GBHS BABRS 30 15 – 30 Box Box Slotted Slotted Cu/Al Cu/Al 14 – 2 14 – 6 24 28 << January 2005 Circuit Breaker Type 27 Index Table 21.3-12. GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings 21 26 TOC Note: For load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below. Table 21.3-14. Dimensions Per Pole in Inches (mm) Item Width Height Depth GHBS 1.00 (25.4) 4.12 (104.8) 2.81 (71.4) GBHS 1.00 (25.4) 4.12 (104.8) 2.81 (71.4) BABR BABRS 1.00 (25.4) 4.08 (104.8) 2.91 (74.0) All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (High Intensity Discharge) rated. Continuous current rating at 40°C. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0613 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-17 Selection Data — Solenoid-Operated Types GHBS, GBHS, BABR and BABRS Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled 20 BABR 1-Pole Circuit Breaker 21 Remote Contact Load Line Breaker Contact Solenoid RM b 23 28V AC 24 Remote Status OFF Coil ON Coil Blue 1/2 Cycle Maximum 28V AC Pulse Source Yellow Auxiliary Red AMP Inc. Conductor Plug Solenoid RM a Black Common 22 a 25 Circuit Breaker Open/Closed Status BABRS Remote Contact Load Line 26 Breaker Contact 27 Solenoid ON Coil Auxiliary Switch OFF Coil BKR a 28 Blue Red Common RM a Black RM b Yellow Conductor Plug (As Viewed From End) Breaker Status Figure 21.3-2. Typical GHBS or GBHS Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram and Conductor Plug Wiring Connections Figure 21.3-3. Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram for the BABR and BABRS Breakers Note: 2-pole breakers have two solenoids. Note: 2-pole breakers have two solenoids. Remote Control Operation Breaker Solenoid and Operating Data The remote-control capability of the breaker is “armed” when the breaker handle is manually switched to the “ON” position. Once armed, the breaker can be pulsed “ON” and “OFF” by a controller device which provides an ac pulse of specified magnitude and duration to the solenoid operated mechanism. Control connections to the breaker are provided through a conductor plug (supplied by others). A normally open (a) auxiliary contact provides for “ON”/“OFF” status indication to the remote controller and/or indicating lamp. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the event the breaker automatically trips, the breaker must be reset manually. ■ ■ ■ ■ Ambient temperature: 0ºC – 40ºC. Nominal pulse magnitude: 28 Vac rms, 24 Vac (BABR). Tolerance: +10% to -15% of nominal voltage. Pulse duration: 1/2 cycle (8 – 10 ms). Minimum recommended pulse current at nominal voltage: ❑ GHBS – 1-Pole: 4.9 amperes peak, 3.5 amperes rms – 2-Pole: 7.84 amperes peak, 5.6 amperes rms ❑ BABR and BABRS – 1-Pole: 1.0 amperes peak – 2-Pole: 2.0 amperes peak Breaker operating time: 20 – 40 ms. Maximum breaker cycling: six operations per minute. Humidity: 0 – 95% non-condensing. The GHBS and GBHS are rated for 25,000 operations while the BABR and BABRS are rated for 250,000 operations. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-18 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — Industrial G-Frame 20 G-Frame, Thermal-Magnetic, 15 – 100 Amperes Number of Poles Width Height Depth 1P G-Frame 1.00 (25.4) 4.00 (101.6) 2.81 (71.4) 2P G-Frame 2.00 (50.8) 4.00 (101.6) 2.81 (71.4) 3P G-Frame 3.00 (76.2) 4.00 (101.6) 2.81 (71.4) GHCGFEP 2.00 (50.8) 4.88 (124.0) 2.81 (71.4) GHBGFEP 2.00 (50.8) 4.00 (101.6) 2.81 (71.4) 22 23 24 Table 21.3-16. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings 25 GHB Breaker 26 GHB, GHC 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 Number of Poles Type Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) of Trip Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc 120 240 277 480 125 250 GHB, GHC GHB, GHC 1 2, 3 N.I.T. N.I.T. 65,000 — — 65,000 14,000 — — 14,000 14,000 — — 14,000 GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP 1 — — 65,000 14,000 — — — 30 Ratings N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. 32 33 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Circuit Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range 15 – 20 25 – 100 Clamp (Plated Steel) Pressure (Aluminum Body) Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) #14 – 10 (1) #10 – 1/0 15 – 20 25 – 60 Clamp Pressure Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) #14 – #10 AWG (1) #10 – 1/0 AWG >> Sheet 0614 Application Notes ■ Table 21.3-18. Terminal Types 31 << January 2005 GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP 277 Volt 30 mA GF Breaker Table 21.3-17. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 28 29 Frame GHCGFEP, GHBGFEP Circuit Breaker Type Index Table 21.3-15. G-Frame — Dimensions in Inches (mm) 21 27 TOC UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. ■ On all 3-phase Delta (240 V) Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton. 480Y/277 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for 3-phase Delta (480 V) Grounded B phase applications. All 2- and 3-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type. Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20 ampere. Switching duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications. Suitable for reverse feed applications. HACR rated. GHCGFEP and GHBGFEP are earth leakage breakers, rated for 30 mA ground fault protection. Type GHB are bolt-on panelboard breakers while type GHC is a cablein and cable-out breaker for standalone mounting typically in a control panel or separate enclosure. Terminals 34 Line side (on GHC) and load side (on GHC and GHB) terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound . 35 Table 21.3-19. Terminals 36 Figure 21.3-4. Electrical Schematic Do not ground neutral anywhere on load side of breaker. Breaker Amperes Terminal Type Wire Type Wire Range 15 – 20 25 – 60 Clamp Pressure Cu/Al Cu/Al #14 – #10 AWG #10 – 1/0 AWG 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0615 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 21.3-19 Selection Data — Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Numbering System 20 Table 21.3-20. Catalog Numbering System — Molded Case Circuit Breakers KD 3 400 T57 W 21 22 Circuit Breaker Frame Type Number of Poles GD ED EDH EDC EHD FDB FD HFD FDC JDB JD HJD JDC DK KDB KD CKD HKD CHDK KDC LDB LD 1 2 3 4 CLD HLD CHLD LDC CLDC MDLB MDL CMDL HMDLB HMDL CHMDL ND CND HND CHND NDC CNDC RD CRD RDC CRDC Circuit Breaker Frame Ampere Rating 15 20 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 (Max. G-Frame) 110 125 150 (Max. EHD-Frame) 175 200 225 (Max. ED&F-Frame) 250 (Max. J-Frame) 300 350 400 (Max. K-Frame) 450 500 600 (Max. L-Frame) 700 800 (Max. M-Frame) 900 1000 1200 (Max. N-Frame) 1250 1400 1500 1600 2000 2500 (Max. R-Frame) Digitrip Trip Unit Type T32 = T33 = T35 = T36 = T55 = T56 = T57 = T76 = T106 = T107 = Digitrip 310 LSI Digitrip 310 LS Digitrip 310 LSG Digitrip 310 LSIG OPTIM 550 LSI OPTIM 550 LSIG OPTIM 550 LSIA OPTIM 1050 LSIG OPTIM 1050 LSIG OPTIM 1050 LSIA Suffix C = E = F = K = T = V = W= X = CU Terminals Protected Neutral Pole Frame Only Molded Case Switch Trip Unit Only 50°C Calibration Without Terminals Load Side Terminals Only Y = Line Side Terminals Only 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Note: This chart is for interpretation of Cutler-Hammer catalog numbers and not for the creation of catalog numbers. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-20 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — G-Frame 20 G-Frame Thermal-Magnetic 15 – 100 Amperes TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0616 Table 21.3-23. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 21 Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles GD 2, 3 22 Type of Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 120 240 277 480 125 250 N.I.T. — 65,000 — 22,000 — 10,000 Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. Table 21.3-24. Line and Load Terminals 23 24 Circuit Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) 15 – 20 25 – 100 Clamp (Plated Steel) Pressure (Aluminum Body) Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) #14 – 10 (1) #10 – 1/0 2.5 – 4 4 – 50 25 UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Not UL listed sizes. 26 G-Frame Breaker 27 28 29 30 Table 21.3-21. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Number Width of Poles Height 2 3 4.88 (124.0) 2.81 (71.4) 4.88 (124.0) 2.81 (71.4) 2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) Depth Table 21.3-22. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Frame Ratings GD 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0617 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-21 Selection Data — E125-Frame EG-Frame Thermal-Magnetic 15 – 125 Amperes Table 21.3-27. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles 20 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Volts dc Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 120 220 – 240 Icu Ics 277 347 380 – 415 Icu Ics Icu Ics 480 600Y/347 250 125 Icu Ics Icu Ics EGB 1 2, 3, 4 35 — 25 25 25 25 18 — — — — — — 18 — 18 — 18 — — 10 — 10 — — 10 — 10 EGE 2, 3, 4 — 35 35 — — — 25 25 25 18 — — 10 10 EGS 1 2, 3, 4 100 — 85 85 43 43 35 — 22 — 22 — — 40 — 30 — 35 — 22 35 — 35 — — 35 — 35 EGH 1 2, 3, 4 200 100 — 100 50 50 65 — 30 — 30 — — 70 — 35 — 65 — 25 42 — 42 — — 42 — 42 dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 42 kA. Note: Contact Eaton for availability of E125 frame breakers in panelboards and switchboards. 21 22 23 24 25 26 E125-Frame Breaker 27 Table 21.3-25. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Number Width of Poles Height Depth 1 2 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 (50.8) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 3 4 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 4.00 (101.6) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9) 28 29 Table 21.3-26. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Frame Ratings EG 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125 EG 16, 32, 63 30 31 Not UL listed. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-22 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — F-Frame 20 F-Frame Thermal-Magnetic 10 – 225 Amperes 22 23 24 25 Number Width of Poles Height Depth N.I.T. ED EDH EDC 2, 3 2, 3 2, 3 EHD 1 2, 3 FDB 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. 18,000 14,000 14,000 — 10,000 FD 1 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. — 65,000 35,000 — — 35,000 — 18,000 10,000 — — 10,000 HFD 1 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. — 100,000 65,000 —. — 65,000 — 25,000 10,000 — — 22,000 FDC 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. 200,000 — 100,000 35,000 — 22,000 HFDDC 3 N.I.T. — — — — — 42,000 1 2 1.38 (34.8) 2.75 (69.9) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7) 3 4 4.13 (104.8) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7) 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (85.7) 31 32 Ratings ED, EDH, EDC 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225 EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC, HFDDC 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150 FD, HFD, FDC 175, 200, 225 Type of Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 2, 3 2, 3 Table 21.3-28. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Frame Sheet 0618 EDB EDS Table 21.3-29. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings 30 >> Number of Poles F-Frame Breaker 29 << January 2005 Circuit Breaker Type 26 28 Index Table 21.3-30. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 21 27 TOC Volts ac (50/60 Hz) Volts dc 277 480 600 125 250 22,000 42,000 — — — — — — 10,000 10,000 — — N.I.T. 65,000 100,000 200,000 — — — — — — — — — 10,000 10,000 10,000 — — — N.I.T. — 18,000 14,000 — — 14,000 — — 10,000 — — 10,000 240 — N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. 2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. Current limiting. HFDDC is UL only and is not tested to other standards. Interrupting rating is 35,000 amperes at 600 Vdc with three poles in series, for ungrounded systems only. Table 21.3-31. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) #14 – #10 (1) #14 – 1/0 (1) #4 – 4/0 (1) #4 – 4/0 2.5 – 4 2.5 – 50 25 – 95 25 – 95 3T20FB 3T100FB 3TA150FB 3TA225FD Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu Cu/Al (1) #14 – #4 2.5 – 16 (1) #14 – 1/0 2.5 – 50 (1) #4 – 4/0 25 – 95 (1) #6 – 300 kcmil 16 – 150 Package of 3 Terminals Standard Pressure Type Terminals 20 (EHD) 100 150 225 Steel Steel Aluminum Aluminum Optional Pressure Terminals 50 100 150 225 Aluminum Aluminum Stainless Steel Aluminum 3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3T150FB 3TA225FDK UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0619 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-23 Selection Data — J250-Frame JG-Frame Electronic RMS, 20 – 250 Amperes Thermal-Magnetic, 63 – 250 Amperes Table 21.3-35. UL 489/IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles 20 Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical Amperes) Volts dc Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 220 – 240 380 – 415 Icu Icu Ics 480 600 Ics 250 690 Icu Ics Icu Ics JGE 2, 3, 4 65 65 25 25 25 18 12 6 10 10 JGS 2, 3, 4 85 85 40 40 35 18 12 6 22 22 JGH 2, 3, 4 100 100 70 70 65 25 14 7 22 22 JGC 2, 3, 4 200 150 100 75 100 50 20 10 42 42 dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. Note: Contact Eaton for availability of J250 frame breakers in panelboards and switchboards. 21 22 23 24 25 26 JG250-Frame Breaker Table 21.3-32. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Number Width of Poles Height 27 Depth 2, 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) 4 5.34 (135.6) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7) 28 29 Table 21.3-33. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Frame Ratings JG JG 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 30 63, 160 Not UL listed. 31 Table 21.3-34. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Units Frame Ratings JG250 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250 JG160 63, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 160 JG100 40, 45, 50, 63, 70, 80, 90, 100 JG50 20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 45, 50 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-24 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — J-Frame 20 J-Frame Thermal-Magnetic, 70 – 250 Amperes 21 22 Number of Poles JDB JD HJD 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. I.T. I.T. 65,000 65,000 100,000 JDC HJDDC 2, 3, 4 3 I.T. I.T. 200,000 — 25 29 30 Sheet 0620 Type of Trip Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 240 Volts dc 600 250 600 35,000 35,000 65,000 18,000 18,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 22,000 — — — 100,000 — 35,000 — 22,000 42,000 — 35,000 480 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip. 2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 8 milliseconds time constant. Current limiting. Three poles in series. Two poles in series. Maximum Breaker Amperes J-Frame Breaker Table 21.3-36. Dimensions in Inches (mm) 28 >> Table 21.3-39. Line and Load Terminals 26 27 << January 2005 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Circuit Breaker Type 24 Index Table 21.3-38. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 23 TOC Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 4.13 (104.8) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (103.2) 4 5.50 (139.7) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (103.2) Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number Cu/Al Cu (1) #4 – 350 kcmil (1) #4 – 350 kcmil 25 – 185 25 – 185 TA250KB T250KB Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals 250 250 Aluminum Stainless Steel UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Table 21.3-37. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Frame Ratings JDB, JD, HJD JDC, HJDDC 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0621 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index Selection Data — K-Frame K-Frame Electronic RMS, 70 – 400 Amperes Thermal-Magnetic, 100 – 400 Amperes Table 21.3-43. NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles DK KDB KD 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. I.T. HKD KDC HKDDC 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 CKD CHKD 3 3 Table 21.3-40. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Number of Poles Width 2, 3 5.50 (139.7) 10.13 (257.2) 4.06 (103.2) 4 7.22 (183.4) 10.13 (257.2) 4.06 (103.2) Depth Frame Ratings DK, FDB, KD, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, HKD,KDC, HKDDC, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 CKD,CHKD Table 21.3-42. Digitrip 310 and OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame Rating Plugs KD, HKD, KDC, CKD, CHKD 70, 90, 100, 110, 125 , 150, 160, 175, 200, 225, 250 , 300, 350, 400 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 480 600 250 600 65,000 65,000 65,000 — 35,000 35,000 — 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 — — — I.T. I.T. I.T. 100,000 200,000 — 65,000 100,000 — 35,000 50,000 — 22,000 22,000 42,000 — — 35,000 I.T. I.T. 65,000 100,000 35,000 65,000 25,000 35,000 10,000 22,000 — — 240 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip. 2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 8 milliseconds time constant. Current limiting. 100% rated. Two poles in series. Three poles in series. Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type 20 Volts dc 21 22 23 24 25 26 AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number (1) 3 – 350 kcmil (1) 250 – 500 kcmil (2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 35 – 185 120 – 240 95 – 120 TA300K TA350K 2TA400K – 2-Pole Kit 3TA400K – 3-Pole Kit 4TA400K – 4-Pole Kit 27 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals Table 21.3-41. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Type of Trip Table 21.3-44. Line and Load Terminals K-Frame Breaker Height 21.3-25 225 350 400 Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 225 350 400 Copper Copper Copper Cu Cu Cu (1) 3 – 350 kcmil (1) 250 – 500 kcmil (2) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 35 – 185 120 – 240 95 – 120 400 Aluminum Cu/Al (2) 2/0 – 250 kcmil or (1) 2/0 – 500 kcmil 70 – 120 70 – 240 70 – 240 T300K T350K 2T400K – 2-Pole Kit 3T400K – 3-Pole Kit 4T400K – 4-Pole Kit 2TA401K – 2-Pole Kit 3TA401K – 3-Pole Kit 4TA401K – 4-Pole Kit UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. TA400K, T400K and TA401K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 28 29 30 31 32 33 160 ampere is only available on Digitrip 310. Adjustable rating plug available on Digitrip 310. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-26 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — L-Frame 20 L-Frame Electronic RMS, 70 – 600 Amperes Thermal-Magnetic, 300 – 600 Amperes 21 22 23 Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles LDB LD, CLD HLD 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. I.T. I.T. 65,000 65,000 100,000 CHLD LDC CLDC HLDDC 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 3 I.T. I.T. I.T. I.T. 100,000 200,000 200,000 — 25 Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0622 Table 21.3-49. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 24 TOC Type of Trip Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes) Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 240 Volts dc 600 250 600 35,000 35,000 65,000 25,000 25,000 35,000 22,000 22,000 25,000 — — — 65,000 100,000 100,000 — 35,000 50,000 50,000 — 25,000 30,000 30,000 42,000 — — — 35,000 480 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip; I.T. is interchangeable trip. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. 2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating T/M trip unit only. 100% rated. Current limiting. 2-poles in series. 3-poles in series. Table 21.3-50. Line and Load Terminals 26 Maximum Breaker Amperes L-Frame Breaker 27 28 29 Table 21.3-45. Dimensions in Inches (mm) 31 32 33 34 35 36 Wire Type AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals Number of Poles Width Height Depth 400 Aluminum Cu/Al (1) 4/0 – 600 kcmil 120 – 300 2TA401LDK – 2-Pole Kit 3TA401LDK – 3-Pole Kit 4TA401LDK – 4-Pole Kit 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.2) 500 600 Aluminum Aluminum Cu/Al (2) 250 – 350 kcmil Cu/Al (2) 400 – 500 kcmil 120 – 150 185 – 240 4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.2) TA602LD 2TA603LDK – 2-Pole Kit 3TA603LDK – 3-Pole Kit 4TA603LDK – 4-Pole Kit 120 – 150 T602LD Optional Copper Pressure Type Terminals Table 21.3-46. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings 30 Terminal Body Material Frame Ratings LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC, HLDDC 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 600 Copper Cu (2) 250 – 350 kcmil UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Table 21.3-47. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame Rating Plugs LDB, LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC 300, 350, 400, 500, 600 300/600 Adjustable Table 21.3-48. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame Rating Plugs LD, CLD, HLD, CHLD, LDC, CLDC 70, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0623 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index M-Frame Electronic RMS, 400 – 800 Amperes Thermal-Magnetic, 300 – 800 Amperes 21.3-27 Selection Data — M-Frame Table 21.3-54. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Type of Trip MDL, CMDL HMDL, CHMDL 2, 3 2, 3 N.I.T. N.I.T. Interrupting Capacity (rms Symmetrical Amperes) 20 Volts dc Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 240 480 600 250 65,000 100,000 50,000 65,000 25,000 35,000 22,000 25,000 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. Two poles or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not dc rated. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA. 100% rated. Not for use on dc. 21 22 23 Table 21.3-55. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors Catalog Number Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al (2) #1 – 500 kcmil (3) 3/0 – 400 kcmil (2) 500 – 750 kcmil TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA (2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil (3) 3/0 – 300 kcmil T600MA1 T800MA1 Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals 600 800 800 Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals M-Frame Breaker Table 21.3-51. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Depth 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.2) 600 800 Copper Copper Cu Cu UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. 24 25 26 27 28 Table 21.3-52. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Frame Ratings MDL 300, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 29 Table 21.3-53. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame Rating Plugs MDL 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 400/800 Adjustable 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-28 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — N-Frame 20 N-Frame Electronic RMS, 400 – 1200 Amperes 21 22 Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0624 Table 21.3-59. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type Number of Poles Type of Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 240 277 ND, CND HND CHND 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 65,000 100,000 100,000 — — — 50,000 65,000 65,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 NDC CNDC 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. 200,000 200,000 — — 100,000 100,000 50,000 50,000 23 TOC Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 480 600 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. 100% rated. Table 21.3-60. Line and Load Terminals 24 Maximum Breaker Amperes 26 700 1000 1200 1200 N-Frame Breaker Table 21.3-56. Dimensions in Inches (mm) 28 29 30 Number of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 4 11.13 (282.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) 32 33 AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al (2) 1 – 500 kcmil (3) 3/0 – 400 kcmil (4) 4/0 – 500 kcmil (3) 500 – 750 kcmil 50 – 300 95 – 185 120 – 300 300 – 400 TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1 TA1201NB1 Optional Copper and Cu/Al Pressure Type Terminals 700 1000 1200 Copper Copper Copper Cu Cu Cu (2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil (3) 3/0 – 500 kcmil (4) 3/0 – 400 kcmil 70 – 300 95 – 300 95 – 185 T700NB1 T1000NB1 T1200NB3 UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Table 21.3-57. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame 800 1200 31 Wire Type Standard Cu/Al Pressure Terminals 25 27 Terminal Body Material Rating Plugs 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,1200 Adjustable rating plug available. Table 21.3-58. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame 800 1200 Ratings 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800 600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0625 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-29 Selection Data — R-Frame R-Frame Electronic RMS, 800 – 2500 Amperes Table 21.3-64. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 20 Circuit Breaker Frame Number of Poles Type of Trip Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) 240 277 480 600 RD CRD RDC CRDC 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 125 125 200 200 — — — — 65 65 100 100 50 50 65 65 Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 21 22 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. 100% rated versions. 23 Table 21.3-65. Line and Load Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type Hardware Aluminum Copper Aluminum Cu/Al Cu Cu/Al English English English AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors Metric Wire Range (mm2) Catalog Number (4) 500 – 1000 kcmil (4) 1 – 600 kcmil (6) 2 – 600 kcmil 300 – 500 50 – 300 35 – 300 TA1600RD T1600RD TA2000RD 24 Wire Terminal 1600 1600 2000 R-Frame Breaker UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. 25 26 Table 21.3-61. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Number of Poles Width Height Depth 3 15.50 (393.7) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 4 20.00 (508.0) 16.00 (406.4) 9.75 (247.7) 27 28 29 Table 21.3-62. Digitrip 310 Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame Rating Plugs 1600 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1500, 1600 2000 1000, 1200, 1250, 1400, 1600, 2000 2500 1200, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500 30 31 Adjustable rating plug available. 32 Table 21.3-63. Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plugs Frame Rating Plugs 1600 2000 2500 800, 1000, 1200, 1600 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000 1600, 2000, 2500 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-30 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Selection Data — Current Limiting 20 January 2005 Sheet 0626 Current Limiting FCL Frame 15 – 100 Amperes, LCL Frame 125 – 400 Amperes FCL Frame LCL Frame 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 FCL Frame Breaker LCL Frame Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings Table 21.3-66. FCL Interrupting Capacity Ratings Table 21.3-68. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Volts ac Type of Interrupting Capacity (50/60 Hz) Trip (Symmetrical Amperes) Frame Number Width of Poles 240 480 FCL 2, 3 N.I.T. N.I.T. 200,000 150,000 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. LCL, LCLG 2, 3 Height Depth 4.13 8.75 3.50 (104.8) (222.3) (88.9) 8.25 16.00 4.00 (209.6) (406.4) (101.6) Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Eaton. Terminals Table 21.3-69. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add suffix “Z” to breaker catalog number listed. Wire Type Frame Ratings FCL 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 Table 21.3-70. SELTRONIC Electronic Trip Unit Rating Plug Frame Ratings LCL, LCLG 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 350, 400 Table 21.3-67. FCL Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes Breaker with built-in ground fault protection. AWG Wire Range Breaker with built-in ground fault protection. 35 36 Al/Cu #14 – 1/0 Al/Cu Al/Cu Interrupting Capacity Ratings Table 21.3-71. LCL Interrupting Capacity Ratings Volts ac Type of Interrupting Capacity (50/60 Hz) Trip (Symmetrical Amperes) 240 480 600 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 200,000 200,000 100,000 N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit. Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Eaton. Terminals Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. Maximum AWG/kcmil Breaker Wire Range/Number Amperes of Conductors Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 50 100 Type LCL breakers are not defined in Federal Specifications W-C-375-b. Table 21.3-72. LCL Terminals Standard Pressure Terminals 100 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories Except as Noted #14 – #4 #4 – 4/0 Terminal Catalog Number Standard Copper Pressure Terminals 225 400 37 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu (1) #4 – 250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu T225LA T401LA Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 38 39 225 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu, or TA225LA1 (1) #4 – 350 kcmil Al 400 (1) #4 – 250 kcmil Al/Cu, TA400LA1 plus (1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0627 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-31 Selection Data — Current Limiting Current Limiting FB TRI-PAC 15-100 Amperes, LA TRI-PAC 70 – 400 Amperes FB TRI-PAC 20 LA TRI-PAC 21 22 23 24 25 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories Except as Noted TRI-PAC FB breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-375b. Table 21.3-74. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Frame Number of Poles Width FB 2, 3 4.13 (104.8) 8.75 (222.3) 3.50 (88.9) LA 2, 3 8.13 (206.4) 16.00 (406.4) 7.75 (196.9) Interrupting Capacity Ratings Underwriters Laboratories Listed 600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical. Based on NEMA Test Procedures 26 LA TRI-PAC Breaker FB TRI-PAC Breaker Height Depth Table 21.3-75. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Listed with Underwriters Laboratories Except as Noted 27 TRI-PAC LA breakers meet the requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-375b. 28 Interrupting Capacity Ratings 29 Underwriters Laboratories Listed Frame Ratings FB TRI-PAC 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100 600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical. LA TRI-PAC 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 Based on NEMA Test Procedures 250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes. 250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes. Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Eaton. Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton. Terminals Terminals Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add suffix “Z” to breaker catalog number listed. Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add suffix “Z” to complete breaker catalog number. Wire Type Maximum AWG/kcmil Breaker Wire Range/Number Amperes of Conductors AWG Wire Range Al/Cu (1) #14 – 1/0 Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 50 100 CA08104001E 32 33 34 35 Terminal Catalog Number 36 37 Standard Copper Pressure Terminals Standard Pressure Terminals 100 31 Table 21.3-76. LA TRI-PAC Terminals Table 21.3-73. FB TRI-PAC Terminals Maximum Breaker Amperes 30 Al/Cu Al/Cu (1) #14 – #4 (1) #4 – 4/0 225 225 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu (1) #6 – 250 kcmil Cu T225LA T225LBF 400 (1) #4 – 250 kcmil Cu, plus (1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu T401LA 38 Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 225 (1) #6 – 350 kcmil Cu, or TA225LA1 (1) #4 – 350 kcmil Al/Cu 39 400 (1) #4 – 250 kcmil Al/Cu, TA400LA1 plus (1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu 40 21.3-32 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — Current Limiting 20 TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0628 Current Limiting NB TRI-PAC 300 – 800 Amperes, PB TRI-PAC 600 – 1600 Amperes NB TRI-PAC PB TRI-PAC 21 22 23 24 25 26 PB TRI-PAC Breaker 27 NB TRI-PAC Breaker 28 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories Except as Noted 29 TRI-PAC NB breakers meet the requirements for Class 16b, 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-375b. 30 32 33 34 35 36 Frame Number Width of Poles Height Depth NB 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 22.00 (558.8) 5.50 (139.7) PB 2, 3 12.06 (306.4) 22.13 (562.0) 9.06 (230.2) Interrupting Capacity Ratings Underwriters Laboratories Listed 31 Table 21.3-78. Dimensions in Inches (mm) 600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical. Based on NEMA Test Procedures Table 21.3-79. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Listed with Underwriters Laboratories Except as Noted TRI-PAC PB breakers meet the requirements for Class 17a and 26a circuit breakers as defined in Federal Specification W-C-375b. Interrupting Capacity Ratings Frame Ratings Underwriters Laboratories Listed NB TRI-PAC 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 600 Vac maximum: 200,000 amperes symmetrical. PB TRI-PAC 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600 Based on NEMA Test Procedures 250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes. 250 Vdc maximum: 100,000 amperes. Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton. Note: On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase applications, refer to Eaton. Terminals Bus Bar Connectors Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are Underwriters Laboratories listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals, add suffix “Z” to complete breaker catalog number. “T” Connector for Cu/Al Bus Two required per pole. For rear bus connection. Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°. Table 21.3-77. NB TRI-PAC Terminals 37 Maximum AWG/kcmil Ampere Wire Range/Number Rating of Conductors Terminal Catalog Number “T” Connector for Cu/Al Bus Standard Copper Pressure Terminals 38 39 40 350 700 800 1 #1 – 600 kcmil Cu 2 2/0 – 500 kcmil Cu 3 3/0 – 500 kcmil Cu Cable Connector (Optional) T350NB T700NB1 T1000NB1 For “T” Connector. Accepts four 600 kcmil copper cables. Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals 700 800 800 2 #1 – 500 kcmil Al/Cu TA700NB1 3 3/0 – 400 kcmil Al/Cu TA1000NB1 3 500 – 750 kcmil Al/Cu TA1201NB1 Optional Cable Connector For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0629 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-33 Selection Data — Earth Leakage Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers F-, J- and K- Frame, ThermalMagnetic, 15 – 400 Amperes Table 21.3-83. Standard Line and Load Terminals — Included with Breakers Frame Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors Poles F F 15 – 100 110 – 150 Steel Stainless Steel Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) #14 – 1/0 (1) #4 – 4/0 3, 4 3, 4 J 100 – 250 Aluminum Cu/Al (1) #4 – 250 kcmil 3, 4 K K 200 – 350 400 Aluminum Aluminum Cu/Al Cu/Al (1) 250 – 250 kcmil (1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 3, 4 3, 4 Table 21.3-80. Dimensions in Inches (mm) Frame Width Height Depth 3-Pole F J K 4.13 (105.0) 11.20 (284.5) 4.14 (105.2) 4.13 (105.0) 13.70 (348.0) 4.94 (125.5) 5.51 (140.0) 13.84 (351.5) 4.91 (124.7) 4-Pole F J K 5.51 (140.0) 11.20 (284.5) 4.14 (105.2) 5.51 (140.0) 13.70 (348.0) 4.94 (125.5) 7.20 (183.0) 13.84 (351.5) 4.91 (124.7) Note: All dimensions are provided for guidance and should not be used for construction purposes unless approved. Table 21.3-81. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Ratings Frame Ratings F 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150 J 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 K 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 Table 21.3-82. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings Circuit Breaker Type No. Type Interrupting Capacity (kA Symmetrical of of Poles Trip Amperes) Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 240 480 ELFD 3, 4 ELHFD 3, 4 ELFDC 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 65 100 200 25 65 100 ELJD 3, 4 ELHJD 3, 4 ELJDC 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 65 100 200 35 65 100 ELKD 3, 4 ELHKD 3, 4 ELKDC 3, 4 N.I.T. N.I.T. N.I.T. 65 100 200 35 65 100 Wire Type AWG/kcmil Wire Range/Number of Conductors Number Kit of Poles Quantity Catalog Number Aluminum Aluminum Cu/Al Cu/Al (2) 250 kcmil (1) 500 kcmil 3 3 2 2 3TA401K 3TA401K Aluminum Aluminum Cu/Al Cu/Al (2) 250 kcmil (1) 500 kcmil 4 4 2 2 4TA401K 4TA401K Copper Copper Cu Cu (1) 3 – 350 kcmil (1) 3 – 350 kcmil 3 4 6 8 T300K T300K Copper Copper Cu Cu (1) 250 – 500 kcmil (1) 250 – 500 kcmil 3 4 6 8 T350K T350K Copper Copper Cu Cu (1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil (1) 3/0 – 250 kcmil 3 4 2 2 3T400K 3T400K UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Application Notes Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Earth Leakage Breakers offer superior Class 1 ground fault protection and improved ground fault coordination capability. Earth leakage ground fault protection differs from other types of systems in its level of sensitivity. The sensitivity of traditional devices is limited by the cumulative error of the residual current sensors and the placement of the phase and neutral conductors inside the current sensor. Leakage breakers are zero sequence sensing devices. They are factory supplied with a single sensor and ground fault relay built-in. This technique allows for protection sensitivities down to the 30 milliampere level. Leakage breakers are provided with a full complement of easy adjustments. The ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from .03 to 30 amperes in eight steps, and the ground fault time delay setting is adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0 seconds in six steps. When the pickup is set to 30 mA, the time delay setting defaults internally to instantaneous only. Increased selectivity provides for improved coordination with upstream and downstream ground fault devices, as well as the flexibility to adjust for transient currents. N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and breaker is factory sealed. Current limiting. CA08104001E 22 23 Terminal Body Material 21 UL listed for use with copper or aluminum conductors as noted. Table 21.3-84. Optional K-Frame Line and Load Terminals Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker 20 Three-Phase, Four-Wire Loads For 3-phase applications with line-to-neutral loads, select 4-pole earth leakage breakers and wire the neutral through the fourth (right) pole. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Three-Phase, Three-Wire Loads For applications with only 3-phase, 3-wire, line-to-line connected loads, select 3-pole earth leakage breakers. 31 Single-Phase Loads 32 For single-phase, 2-wire or 3-wire applications, use a 3-pole earth leakage breaker and connect all conductors through the breaker. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-34 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors 20 TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0630 Motor Circuit Protectors, 3 – 1200 Amperes 21 22 23 24 25 26 Motor Circuit Protectors 3 – 1200 Amperes Catalog Numbering System 27 Note: This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Table 21.3-85. Catalog Numbering System — HMCP 28 Table 21.3-86. Catalog Numbering System — GMCP/HMCPE GMCP/HMCPE 003 A0 C HMCP 003 A0 C 29 Motor Circuit Protector Type 30 HMCP = 3-Pole HM2P = 2-Pole HMCPS= 3-Pole 31 Continuous Ampere Rating 32 003 = 3 007 = 7 015 = 15 025 = 25 030 = 30 050 = 50 070 = 70 100 = 100 150 = 150 250 = 250 400 = 400 600 = 600 800 = 800 12 = 1200 33 34 35 36 37 38 Motor Circuit Protector Type Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size A0 = 9 – 30/0 C0 = 21 – 70/0 E0 = 45 – 150/0 D0 = 40 – 60/0 H1 = 90 – 300/1 G2 = 80 – 120/2 K2 = 150 – 500/2 J2 = 115 – 170/2 M2 = 210 – 700/2 L3 = 160 – 240/3 R3 = 300 – 1000/3 T4 = 450 – 1500/4 U4 = 750 – 2500/4 A5 = 350 – 700/5 C5 = 450 – 900/5 Non-Aluminum Terminals W/O Terminals Load Terminals Only Line Terminals Only Stainless Steel Terms (150 A Frame Only) No Suffix = Standard Terminals on Line and Load (Electronic) On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only. = = = = = GMCP = 3-Pole HMCPE = 3-Pole D5 = 500 – 1000/5 F5 = 625 – 1250/5 G5 = 750 – 1500/5 J5 = 875 – 1750/5 K5 = 1000 – 2000/5 L5 = 1125 – 2250/5 W5 = 1250 – 2500/5 N5 = 1500 – 3000/5 R5 = 1750 – 3500/5 X5 = 2000 – 4000/5 L6 = 1800 – 6000/6 X6 = 500 – 2500 Y6 = 1000 – 4000 X7 = 1600 – 6400 Y8 = 2400 – 9600 Suffix C W X Y S Continuous Ampere Rating 003 = 3 007 = 7 015 = 15 030 = 30 050 = 50 060 = 60 063 = 63 070 = 70 100 = 100 A0 = C0 = E0 = H1 = K2 = J2 = M2 = 15 – 30 35 – 70 75 – 150 150 – 300 250 – 500 300 – 600 320 – 630 HMCPE A0 = C0 = E0 = H1 = K2 = — M2 = R3 = T3 = 9 – 33 21 – 77 45 – 165 90 – 330 150 – 550 210 – 770 300 – 1100 500 – 1500 Suffix C = Non Aluminum Terminals Table 21.3-87. 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP Catalog Number JG-Frame 250 500 – 1000 625 – 1250 750 – 1500 HMCPJ250D5L HMCPJ250F5L HMCPJ250G5L 875 – 1750 1000 – 2000 1125 – 2250 1250 – 2500 HMCPJ250J5L HMCPJ250K5L HMCPJ250L5L HMCPJ250W5L 1125 – 2250 1500 – 3000 1750 – 3500 HMCPL600L HMCPL600N HMCPL600R 2000 – 4000 2250 – 4500 2500 – 5000 3000 – 6000 HMCPL600X HMCPL600Y HMCPL600P HMCPL600M LG-Frame 600 39 40 Magnetic Trip Range GMCP UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters. Equipped with an electronic trip device. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0631 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors General Information Accessories Designated as the Eaton’s CutlerHammer Types GMCP, HMCPE and HMCP are instantaneous-only motor circuit protectors. The GMCP and HMCPE are 480V devices rated between 3 – 100 amperes. The HMCP is a 600V device available in four frames and rated between 3 – 600 amperes. The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1. Termination Accessories An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings. The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1. The interrupting rating is defined on the assembled equipment nameplate. 21.3-35 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Line and load terminals. Keeper nut/plug nut. Control wire terminal kit. Base mounting hardware. Terminal shields. Terminal end covers. Interphase barriers. ELC current limiter. Multiwire connector. Internal Accessories ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Only one internal accessory per pole maximum. Alarm lockout (Make/Break). Alarm lockout (2Make/2Break). Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B). Auxiliary switch (2A, 2B). Auxiliary switch/alarm lockout. Shunt Trip — standard. Shunt Trip — low energy. Undervoltage release mechanism. External Accessories ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Non-padlockable handle block. Padlockable handle block. Padlockable handle lock hasp. Key interlock kit. Sliding bar interlock — requires two breakers. Electrical (solenoid) operator. Handle mechanism. Door hardware/accessories. DIN rail adapter (GMCP only). Modifications Moisture fungus treatment. ■ Freeze test. ■ 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-36 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Motor Protection Note: These recommendations are based on previous code interpretations. See the current NEC for exact up-to-date information. In line with NEC 430-6(a), circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse rating selections are based on full-load currents for induction motors running at speeds normal for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics using data shown taken from NEC table 430-150 (3-phase). Actual motor nameplate ratings shall be used for selecting motor running overload protection. Motors built special for low speeds, high torque characteristics, special starting conditions and applications will require other considerations as defined in the application section of the NEC. Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse ampere rating selections are in line with maximum rules given in NEC 430-52 and Table 430-152. Based on known characteristics of Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer type breakers, specific units are recommended. The current ratings are no more than the maximum limits set by the NEC rules for motors with code letters F to V or without code letters. Motors with lower code letters will require further considerations. 30 In general, these selections were based on: 31 1. Ambient — outside enclosure not more than 40°C (104°F). 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 2. Motor starting — infrequent starting, stopping or reversing. 3. Motor accelerating time — 10 seconds or less. 4. Locked rotor — maximum six times motor FLA. For motor full load currents of 208 and 200 volts, increase the corresponding 230-volt motor values by 10 and 15% respectively. Sheet 0632 Table 21.3-88. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide Hp Full Load Amperes (NEC) FLA Fuse Size NEC 430-152 Maximum Amperes Recommended Cutler-Hammer MCPs & Circuit Breakers Time Delay Amperes Non-Time Delay Circuit Breaker Motor Circuit Protector Type HMCP Type Amperes Adj. Range 230 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3 3.6 5.2 6.8 9.6 10 10 15 20 15 20 25 30 15 15 15 20 HFD HFD HFD HFD 7 7 15 15 21 – 70 21 – 70 45 – 150 45 – 150 5 7-1/2 10 15 15.2 22 28 42 30 40 50 80 50 70 90 150 30 50 60 90 HFD HFD HFD HFD 30 30 50 70 90 – 300 90 – 300 150 – 500 210 – 700 20 25 30 40 54 68 80 104 100 125 150 200 175 225 250 350 100 125 150 150 HFD HFD HFD HFD 100 100 150 150 300 – 1000 300 – 1000 450 – 1500 450 – 1500 50 60 75 100 130 154 192 248 250 300 350 450 400 500 600 800 200 225 300 400 HFD HFD HKD HKD 150 250 400 600 750 – 2500 1250 – 2500 2000 – 4000 1800 – 6000 125 150 200 312 360 480 600 700 1000 1000 1200 1600 500 600 700 HLD HLD HND 600 — — 1800 – 6000 — — 460 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.8 6 6 6 10 6 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 HFD HFD HFD HFD 3 7 7 7 9 – 30 21 – 70 21 – 70 21 – 70 5 7-1/2 10 15 7.6 11 14 21 15 20 25 40 25 35 45 70 15 25 35 45 HFD HFD HFD HFD 15 15 30 30 45 – 150 45 – 150 90 – 300 90 – 300 20 25 30 40 27 34 40 52 50 60 70 100 90 110 125 175 50 70 70 100 HFD HFD HFD HFD 50 50 70 100 150 – 500 150 – 500 210 – 700 300 – 1000 50 60 75 100 65 77 96 124 125 150 175 225 200 150 300 400 110 250 150 175 HFD HFD HJD HJD 100 150 150 150 300 – 1000 450 – 1500 450 – 1500 750 – 2500 125 150 200 156 180 240 300 350 450 500 600 800 225 250 350 HJD HJD HKD 250 250 400 1250 – 2500 1250 – 2500 2000 – 4000 575 Volts, 3-Phase 1 1-1/2 2 3 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.9 3 6 6 10 6 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 HFD HFD HFD HFD 3 3 7 7 9 – 30 9 – 30 21 – 70 21 – 70 5 7-1/2 10 15 6.1 9 11 17 15 20 20 30 20 30 35 60 15 20 25 40 HFD HFD HFD HFD 15 15 15 30 45 – 150 45 – 150 45 – 150 90 – 300 20 25 30 40 22 27 32 41 40 50 60 80 70 90 100 125 50 60 60 80 HFD HFD HFD HFD 50 50 50 70 150 – 500 150 – 500 150 – 500 210 – 700 50 60 75 100 52 62 77 99 100 110 150 175 175 200 250 300 100 125 150 175 HFD HFD HFD HJD 100 100 150 150 300 – 1000 300 – 1000 450 – 1500 450 – 1500 125 150 200 125 144 192 225 300 350 400 450 600 200 225 300 HJD HJD HKD 250 250 400 875 – 1750 1250 – 2500 2000 – 4000 5. Type HMCP motor circuit protector may not set at more than 1300% of the motor full-load current, to comply with the NEC, Sec. 430-52. (Except for new E rated motor which can be set up to 1700%.) Circuit breaker selections are based on types with standard interrupting ratings. Higher interrupting rating types may be required to satisfy specific system application requirements. January 2005 Consult fuse manufacturer’s catalog for smaller fuse ratings. Types are for minimum interrupting capacity breakers. Ensure that the fault duty does not exceed breakers I.C. Designers should verify and specify motor inrush currents to fall within the magnetic pick-up range, or use a higher range product. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0633 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Motor Circuit Protector Catalog Numbers and Ranges The following tables provide specific catalog numbers and application ranges for the G-Frame (GMCP), E-Frame (HMCPE), J-Frame (HMCP) and K-Frame (HMCP) motor circuit protectors. Motor circuit protector models are available with earth leakage ground fault protection. Models are also available for motor starters provided with electronic overload relays rather than thermal overload relays, such as the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Advantage motor starter. Similar tables for the selection of the settings are provided with motor control products which use motor circuit protectors. As required by the NEC, the HMCP setting is selected by using the actual full load ampere data from the motor nameplate. The corresponding trip settings provided are within 13 times the minimum full load amperes of the motor as required by the NEC. The NEC allows a higher setting for Design E motors. Table 21.3-90. E-Frame MCP Catalog Number NEMA Starter Size HMCPE003A0C 0 HMCPE007C0C HMCPE015E0C 0 0 Continuous Amperes 3 7 15 Table 21.3-89. G-Frame MCP Catalog Number NEMA Starter Size GMCP003A0C 0, 1 Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting HMCPE030H1C GMCP007C0C GMCP015E0C GMCP030H1C GMCP050K2C GMCP060J2C GMCP063M2C 0, 1 0, 1 1 2 3 3 3 7 15 30 50 60 63 A B C 1.1 – 1.2 1.3 – 1.5 1.6 – 1.7 15 18 21 D E F 1.8 – 1.9 2.0 – 2.2 2.3 – 2.5 24 27 30 A B C 2.6 – 3.1 3.2 – 3.6 3.7 – 3.9 35 42 49 D E F 4.3 – 4.7 4.8 – 5.2 5.3 – 5.7 56 63 70 A B C 5.7 – 6.8 6.9 – 7.9 8.0 – 9.1 75 90 105 D E F 9.2 – 10.3 10.4 – 11.4 11.5 – 12.6 120 135 150 A B C 12.7 – 13.7 13.8 – 16.0 16.1 – 18.3 150 180 210 D E F 18.4 – 20.6 20.7 – 22.9 23.0 – 25.2 240 270 300 A B C 19.3 – 22.9 23.0 – 26.8 26.9 – 30.6 250 300 350 D E F 30.7 – 34.5 34.6 – 38.3 38.4 – 42.1 400 450 500 A B C 23.1 – 27.5 27.7 – 32.2 32.3 – 36.7 300 360 420 D E F 36.9 – 41.4 41.5 – 46.0 46.2 – 50.5 480 540 600 A B C 24.2 – 32.1 29.1 – 34.8 33.9 – 39.4 320 380 440 D E F 38.8 – 46.4 43.6 – 48.9 48.5 – 53.7 500 570 630 HMCPE050K2C 1 2 HMCPE070M2C 2 HMCPE100R3C HMCPE100T3C 3 3 30 50 70 10 0 10 0 Cam Setting For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 20 Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting A B C .69 – .91 1.1 – 1.3 1.6 – 1.7 9 15 21 D E F 2.0 – 2.2 2.3 – 2.5 2.3 – 2.6 27 30 33 A B C 1.5 – 2.0 2.6 – 3.1 3.7 – 3.9 21 35 49 D E F 4.8 – 5.2 5.3 – 5.7 5.8 – 6.1 63 70 77 24 A B C 3.4 – 4.5 5.7 – 6.8 8.0 – 9.1 45 75 105 25 D E F 10.4 – 11.4 11.5 – 12.6 12.7 – 13.0 135 150 165 26 A B C 3.9 – 9.1 11.5 – 13.7 16.1 – 18.3 90 150 210 D E F 20.7 – 22.9 23.0 – 25.2 25.3 – 26.1 270 300 330 A B C 11.5 – 15.2 19.2 – 22.9 26.9 – 30.6 150 250 350 D E F 34.6 – 38.3 38.4 – 42.1 42.2 – 43.5 450 500 550 A B C 16.1 – 30.6 26.9 – 32.2 37.6 – 42.9 210 350 490 D E F 48.4 – 53.7 53.8 – 59.1 59.2 – 60.9 630 700 770 31 A B C 23.0 – 30.6 38.4 – 46.0 53.8 – 61.4 300 500 700 32 D E F 69.2 – 76.8 76.9 – 84.5 84.6 – 87.0 900 1000 1100 33 A B C 38.4 – 46.0 53.8 – 61.4 69.2 – 76.8 500 700 900 34 D E F 84.6 – 76.8 110 1300 1500 35 21 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 10x In are for special applications. NEC Article 430-110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be no less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. CA08104001E 21.3-37 22 23 27 28 29 30 36 37 38 39 40 21.3-38 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Table 21.3-91. F-Frame (Also Available with Earth Leakage Ground Fault) 20 MCP Trip Setting MCP Catalog Number NEMA Continuous Starter Amperes Size Cam Motor Setting Full Load Current Amperes HMCP003A0 0, 1 A B C .69 – .91 .92 – 1.0 1.1 – 1.2 9 12 15 D E F 1.3 – 1.5 1.6 – 1.7 1.8 – 1.9 G H 24 25 21 3 January 2005 Sheet 0634 (Continued) MCP Catalog Number NEMA Continuous Starter Amperes Size 16.1 – 21.4 21.5 – 26.8 26.9 – 32.2 210 280 350 18 21 24 D E F 32.3 – 37.5 37.6 – 42.9 43.0 – 48.3 420 490 560 2.0 – 2.2 2.3 – 2.5 27 30 G H 48.4 – 53.7 53.8 – 59.1 630 700 A B C 1.5 – 2.0 2.1 – 2.5 2.6 – 3.1 21 28 35 A B C 23.0 – 30.6 30.7 – 38.3 38.4 – 46.0 300 400 500 D E F 3.2 – 3.6 3.7 – 3.9 4.3 – 4.7 42 49 56 D E F 46.1 – 53.7 53.8 – 61.4 61.5 – 69.1 600 700 800 G H 4.8 – 5.2 5.3 – 5.7 63 70 G H 69.2 – 76.8 76.9 – 84.5 900 1000 A B C 3.4 – 4.5 4.6 – 5.6 5.7 – 6.8 45 60 75 A B C 34.6 – 46.0 46.1 – 57.5 57.6 – 69.1 450 600 750 27 D E F 6.9 – 7.9 8.0 – 9.1 9.2 – 10.3 90 105 120 D E F 69.2 – 80.6 80.7 – 92.2 92.3 – 103.7 900 1050 1200 28 G H 10.4 – 11.4 11.5 – 12.6 135 150 G H 103.8 – 115.2 115.3 – 126.7 1350 1500 A B C 6.9 – 9.1 9.2 – 11.4 11.5 – 13.7 90 120 150 A B C 57.0 – 75.0 76.0 – 95.0 96.0 – 114.0 750 1000 1250 D E F 13.8 – 16.0 16.1 – 18.3 18.4 – 20.6 180 210 240 D E F 115.0 – 130.7 1500 1750 2000 G H 20.7 – 22.9 23.0 – 25.2 270 300 G H 2250 2500 A B C 11.5 – 15.2 15.3 – 19.1 19.2 – 22.9 150 200 250 D E F 23.0 – 26.8 26.9 – 30.6 30.7 – 34.5 300 350 400 G H 34.6 – 38.3 38.4 – 42.1 450 500 23 HMCP007C0 26 HMCP015E0 HMCP030H1 0, 1 0, 1 1 7 15 30 29 30 31 HMCP050K2 32 33 34 35 2 50 HMCP100R3 HMCP150T4 3 4 HMCP150U4 4 70 MCP Trip Setting A B C 22 HMCP070M2 2 Cam Motor Setting Full Load Current Amperes 100 150 150 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0635 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Table 21.3-92. MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays (Also available with Earth Leakage Ground Fault) 20 (Continued) MCP Catalog Number MCP NEMA Continuous Cam Motor Trip Starter Amperes Setting Full Load Setting Size Current Amperes MCP Catalog Number HMCPS003A0 0, 1 HMCPS050K2C 2 HMCPS007C0 HMCPS015E0C 0, 1 0, 1 HMCPS030H1C 1 3 7 15 30 21.3-39 A B C .69 – .91 .92 – 1.0 1.1 – 1.2 9 12 15 D E F 1.3 – 1.5 1.6 – 1.7 1.8 – 1.9 G H NEMA Continuous Cam Motor Starter Amperes Setting Full Load Size Current Amperes 21 A B C 11.5 – 15.2 15.3 – 19.1 19.2 – 22.9 150 200 250 18 21 24 D E F 23.0 – 26.8 26.9 – 30.6 30.7 – 34.5 300 350 400 2.0 – 2.2 2.3 – 2.5 27 30 G H 34.6 – 38.3 38.4 – 42.1 450 500 A B C 1.5 – 2.0 2.1 – 2.5 2.6 – 3.1 21 28 35 A B C 23.0 – 30.6 30.7 – 38.3 38.4 – 46.0 300 400 500 D E F 3.2 – 3.6 3.7 – 3.9 4.3 – 4.7 42 49 56 D E F 46.1 – 53.7 53.8 – 61.4 61.5 – 69.1 600 700 800 G H 4.8 – 5.2 5.3 – 5.7 63 70 G H 69.2 – 76.8 76.9 – 84.5 900 1000 A B C 3.4 – 4.5 4.6 – 5.6 5.7 – 6.8 45 60 75 A B C 34.6 – 46.0 46.1 – 57.5 57.6 – 69.1 450 600 750 27 D E F 6.9 – 7.9 90 8.0 – 9.1 105 9.2 – 10.3 120 D E F 69.2 – 80.6 900 80.7 – 92.2 1050 92.3 – 103.7 1200 28 G H 10.4 – 11.4 135 11.5 – 12.6 150 G H 103.8 – 115.2 1350 115.3 – 126.7 1500 A B C 6.9 – 9.1 90 9.2 – 11.4 120 11.5 – 13.7 150 A B C 57.0 – 75.0 750 76.0 – 95.0 1000 96.0 – 114.0 1250 29 D E F 13.8 – 16.0 180 16.1 – 18.3 210 18.4 – 20.6 240 D E F 115.0 – 130.7 1500 1750 2000 30 G H 20.7 – 22.9 270 23.0 – 25.2 300 G H Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. HMCPS100R3C 3 HMCP150T4C HMCP150U4C 4 4 50 MCP Trip Setting 100 150 150 2250 2500 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article 430-110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. 22 23 24 25 26 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-40 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Table 21.3-93. J-Frame (Also available with Earth Leakage Ground Fault) 20 MCP Catalog Number NEMA Continuous Cam Motor Starter Amperes Setting Full Load Size Current Amperes HMCP250A5 4 4 4 21 22 23 24 HMCP250C5 Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0636 (Continued) MCP Catalog Number NEMA Starter Size Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting HMCP250J5 5 5 5 250 A B C 67.4 – 75.3 75.4 – 83.8 83.9 – 92.3 875 980 1090 A B C 27.0 – 30.7 30.8 – 33.8 33.9 – 36.9 350 400 440 5 5 5 D E F 37.0 – 40.3 40.4 – 43.8 43.9 – 46.9 480 525 570 5 5 5 D E F 92.4 – 100.7 100.8 – 109.2 109.3 – 117.6 1200 1310 1420 5 5 5 G H I 47.0 – 50.7 50.8 – 53.8 53.9 – 57.2 610 660 700 5 5 5 G H I 117.7 – 126.1 126.2 – 134.6 134.7 – 142.8 1530 1640 1750 A B C 34.7 – 38.8 38.9 – 43.4 43.5 – 47.6 450 505 565 A B C 77.0 – 86.5 86.6 – 96.1 96.2 – 105.7 1000 1125 1250 5 5 5 250 MCP Trip Setting TOC 250 HMCP250K5 5 5 5 250 25 5 5 5 D E F 47.7 – 52.2 52.3 – 56.5 56.6 – 60.7 620 680 735 5 5 5 D E F 105.8 – 115.3 115.4 – 124.9 125.0 – 134.6 1375 1500 1625 26 5 5 5 G H I 60.8 – 64.9 65.0 – 69.2 69.3 – 73.5 790 845 900 5 5 5 G H I 134.7 – 144.2 144.3 – 153.8 153.9 – 163.3 1750 1875 2000 A B C 38.5 – 43.4 43.5 – 48.0 48.1 – 53.0 500 565 625 A B C 86.6 – 97.3 97.4 – 108.4 108.5 – 118.8 1125 1265 1410 HMCP250D5 27 5 5 5 28 5 5 5 D E F 53.1 – 57.6 57.7 – 62.3 62.4 – 67.3 690 750 810 5 5 5 D E F 118.9 – 129.9 130.0 – 140.7 140.8 – 151.5 1545 1690 1830 5 5 5 G H I 67.4 – 71.9 72.0 – 76.9 77.0 – 81.6 875 935 1000 5 5 5 G H I 151.6 – 162.3 162.4 – 173.0 173.1 – 183.6 1970 2110 2250 A B C 48.1 – 53.8 53.9 – 59.9 60.0 – 66.1 625 700 780 A B C 96.2 – 108.0 108.1 – 119.9 120.0 – 132.3 1250 1405 1560 5 5 5 D E F 66.2 – 72.3 72.4 – 78.4 78.5 – 83.8 860 940 1020 5 5 5 D E F 132.4 – 144.2 144.3 – 156.1 156.2 – 168.0 1720 1875 2030 31 5 5 5 G H I 83.9 – 89.9 90.0 – 96.1 96.2 – 102.0 1090 1170 1250 5 5 5 G H I 168.1 – 179.9 180.0 – 192.3 192.4 – 204.0 2185 2340 2500 32 HMCP250G5 5 5 5 A B C 57.7 – 64.6 64.7 – 71.9 72.0 – 79.2 750 840 935 33 5 5 5 D E F 79.3 – 86.5 86.6 – 93.8 93.9 – 101.1 1030 1125 1220 5 5 5 G H I 101.2 – 108.4 108.5 – 115.3 115.4 – 122.4 1315 1410 1500 29 HMCP250F5 30 34 35 36 5 5 5 250 250 250 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.” Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. HMCP250L5 HMCP250W5 5 5 5 250 250 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.” Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Table 21.3-94. JG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum Continuous Amperes 250 37 38 5 5 5 MCP Trip Range (Amperes) 500 – 1000 625 – 1250 750 – 1500 MCP Catalog Number HMCPJ250D5L HMCPJ250F5L HMCPJ250G5L 875 – 1750 HMCPJ250J5L 1000 – 2000 HMCPJ250K5L 1125 – 2250 HMCPJ250L5L 1250 – 2500 HMCPJ250W5L UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters. 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0637 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Table 21.3-95. K-Frame (Continued) MCP Catalog Number NEMA Continuous Starter Amperes Size Cam Motor Setting Full Load Current Amperes HMCP400D5 5 5 5 A B C 38.5 – 43.4 43.5 – 48.0 48.1 – 53.0 500 565 625 5 5 5 D E F 53.1 – 57.6 57.7 – 62.3 62.4 – 67.3 690 750 810 5 5 5 G H I 67.4 – 71.9 72.0 – 76.9 77.0 – 81.6 875 935 1000 A B C 48.1 – 53.8 53.9 – 59.9 60.0 – 66.1 625 700 780 5 5 5 D E F 66.2 – 72.3 72.4 – 78.4 78.5 – 83.8 860 940 1020 5 5 5 G H I 83.9 – 89.9 90.0 – 96.1 96.2 – 102.0 1090 1170 1250 A B C 57.7 – 64.6 64.7 – 71.9 72.0 – 79.2 750 840 935 5 5 5 D E F 79.3 – 86.5 86.6 – 93.8 93.9 – 101.1 1030 1125 1220 5 5 5 G H I 101.2 – 108.4 108.5 – 115.3 115.4 – 122.4 1315 1410 1500 A B C 67.4 – 75.3 75.4 – 83.8 83.9 – 92.3 875 980 1090 5 5 5 D E F 92.4 – 100.7 100.8 – 109.2 109.3 – 117.6 1200 1310 1420 5 5 5 G H I 117.7 – 126.1 126.2 – 134.6 134.7 – 142.8 1530 1640 1750 A B C 77.0 – 86.5 86.6 – 96.1 96.2 – 105.7 1000 1125 1250 5 5 5 D E F 105.8 – 115.3 115.4 – 124.9 125.0 – 134.6 1375 1500 1625 5 5 5 G H I 134.7 – 144.2 144.3 – 153.8 153.9 – 163.3 1750 1875 2000 A B C 86.6 – 97.3 97.4 – 108.4 108.5 – 118.8 1125 1265 1410 5 5 5 D E F 118.9 – 129.9 130.0 – 140.7 140.8 – 151.5 1545 1690 1830 5 5 5 G H I 151.6 – 162.3 162.4 – 173.0 173.1 – 183.6 1970 2110 2250 HMCP400F5 HMCP400G5 HMCP400J5 HMCP400K5 HMCP400L5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 21.3-41 400 400 400 400 400 400 MCP Trip Setting NEMA Starter Size Continuous Cam Amperes Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes HMCP400W5 5 5 5 400 A B C 96.2 – 108.0 1250 108.1 – 119.9 1405 120.0 – 132.3 1560 5 5 5 D E F 132.4 – 144.2 1720 144.3 – 156.1 1875 156.2 – 168.0 2030 5 5 5 G H I 168.1 – 179.9 2185 180.0 – 192.3 2340 192.4 – 204.0 2500 A B C 115.4 – 129.9 1500 130.0 – 144.2 1690 144.3 – 158.4 1875 24 5 5 5 D E F 158.5 – 173.0 2060 173.1 – 187.6 2250 187.7 – 201.9 2440 25 5 5 5 G H I 202.0 – 216.1 2625 216.2 – 230.7 2810 230.8 – 244.9 3000 26 A B C 134.7 – 151.5 1750 151.6 – 168.4 1970 168.5 – 185.3 2190 5 5 5 D E F 185.4 – 201.9 2410 202.0 – 218.8 2625 218.9 – 235.7 2845 5 5 5 G H I 235.8 – 252.6 3065 252.7 – 269.2 3285 269.3 – 285.7 3500 A B C 153.9 – 173.0 2000 173.1 – 192.3 2250 192.4 – 211.5 2500 5 5 5 D E F 211.6 – 230.7 2750 230.8 – 249.9 3000 250.0 – 269.2 3250 5 5 5 G H I 269.3 – 288.4 3500 288.5 – 307.6 3750 307.7 – 326.9 4000 HMCP400N5 HMCP400R5 HMCP400X5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 400 400 400 MCP Trip Setting 20 MCP Catalog Number Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.” Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with “HM2P” in place of “HMCP.” Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. For dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 21 22 23 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-42 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Selection Data — Motor Circuit Protectors Table 21.3-96. L-Frame 20 21 MCP Catalog Number 600 Cam Motor Full Setting Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting MCP Catalog Number A B C 138.5 – 184.5 184.6 – 230.7 230.8 – 276.8 1800 2400 3000 HMCP800X7W 7 7 7 7 7 7 22 6 6 6 D E F 276.9 – 323.0 323.1 – 369.1 369.2 – 415.3 3600 4200 4800 23 6 6 G H 415.4 – 461.4 461.5 – 507.7 5400 6000 A B C 138.5 – 184.5 184.6 – 230.7 230.8 – 276.8 1800 2400 3000 6 6 6 D E F 276.9 – 323.0 323.1 – 369.1 369.2 – 415.3 3600 4200 4800 6 6 G H 415.4 – 461.4 461.5 – 507.7 5400 6000 A B C 38.5 – 46.1 46.2 – 61.4 61.5 – 76.8 500 600 800 24 HMCP600L6W 6 6 6 25 600 26 HMCP600X6W 6 6 6 27 6 6 6 D E F 76.9 – 96.1 96.2 – 115.3 115.4 – 153.7 1000 1250 1500 6 6 G H 153.8 – 192.2 192.3 – 230.7 2000 2500 A B C 76.9 – 96.1 96.2 – 115.3 115.4 – 153.7 1000 1250 1500 6 6 6 D E F 153.8 – 192.2 192.3 – 230.7 230.8 – 269.1 2000 2500 3000 6 6 G H 269.2 – 307.6 307.7 – 346.1 3500 4000 28 HMCP600Y6W 6 6 6 29 30 31 32 Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0638 Table 21.3-97. N-Frame NEMA Continuous Starter Amperes Size HMCP600L6W 6 6 6 TOC 600 600 Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. In accordance with the requirements of the NEC, a setting of 17 times FLA is permitted for Design E motors. NEMA Continuous Starter Amperes Size 800 7 HMCP12Y8W Cam Motor Full Setting Load Current Amperes MCP Trip Setting A B C 123.1 – 184.5 184.6 – 246.1 246.2 – 307.6 1600 2400 3200 D E F 307.7 – 369.1 369.2 – 430.7 430.8 – 492.2 4000 4800 5600 G 492.3 – 553.7 6400 A B C 184.6 – 276.8 276.9 – 369.1 369.2 – 461.4 2400 3600 4800 7 7 7 D E F 461.5 – 553.7 553.8 – 646.1 646.2 – 738.4 6000 7200 8400 7 G 738.5 – 830.7 9600 7 7 7 1200 Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. Table 21.3-98. LG-Frame 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Minimum Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range (Amperes) MCP Catalog Number 250 1125 – 2250 1500 – 3000 1750 – 3500 HMCPL600L HMCPL600N HMCPL600R 2000 – 4000 2250 – 4500 2500 – 5000 3000 – 6000 HMCPL600X HMCPL600Y HMCPL600P HMCPL600M UL listed for use with Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters. Equipped with an electronic trip device. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0639 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-43 Selection Data — Trip Units Electronic RMS Trip Unit Electronic trip units are applied to distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination are called for. In addition, electronic trip units can provide further enhanced features such as alarming, diagnostics, system monitoring and communications. General Eaton offers the most comprehensive range of electronic trip units in the industry for Molded Case Circuit Breakers. All electronic trip units are rms sensing and can be applied from 70 amperes up through 2500 amperes. Eaton offers electronic trip units as standard for circuit breakers rated 800 amperes and above and offers electronic trip units as optional for circuit breakers 70 amperes up through 600 amperes. Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip units fall into two main categories: Front adjustable trip units (Digitrip RMS 310, 310+, 510, 610, 810 and 910). ■ Programmable trip units (Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050). ■ Digitrip electronic trip units are ac devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true rms current sensing means for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. The primary function of the Digitrip electronic trip unit is to provide circuit protection. This is achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker shunt trip when pre-set current levels and time delay settings are exceeded. Front Adjustable Trip Units Front adjustable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to nine time-current setting options that are set by switches mounted on the front of the trip unit. The application for front adjustable trip units would be distribution systems that can be coordinated within the range of settings available and that do not require sophisticated coordination strategies to be applied down through the distribution system to small rated breakers. Programmable Trip Units (OPTIM) Programmable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to ten timecurrent setting options that are programmed electronically by the use of a programming device. The application for programmable trip units would be high integrity distribution systems that require superior levels of system coordination coupled with system alarming, diagnostics and monitoring. Rating Plugs Rating plugs provide a means to establish the breaker’s continuous current rating. Rating plugs are color-coded and interchangeable to make it easy to match the correct rating plug with the correct trip unit. The same rating plug can be applied to both 50 and 60 Hz distribution systems. In general, most rating plugs are of the fixed ampere rating type. Eaton does offer an adjustable rating plug as an option for the Digitrip RMS 310 trip unit. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Table 21.3-99. The Digitrip Family of Low Voltage Electronic Trip Units RMS 310 RMS 310+ RMS 510 OPTIM 550 RMS 610 RMS 810 RMS 910 OPTIM 1050 30 31 32 33 rms Sensing — 5 Functions — Front Adjustable rms Sensing — 6 Functions — Front Adjustable rms Sensing — 9 Functions — Front Adjustable — Zone Selective Interlocking rms Sensing — 10 Functions — Programmable — Load Monitoring — Diagnostics — Zone Selective Interlocking — Communications rms Sensing — 9 Functions — Front Adjustable — Zone Selective Interlocking — Load Monitoring — Diagnostics rms Sensing — 9 Functions — Front Adjustable — Zone Selective Interlocking — Load Monitoring — Diagnostics — Communications — Power and Energy Monitoring rms Sensing — 9 Functions — Front Adjustable — Zone Selective Interlocking — Load Monitoring — Diagnostics — Communications — Power and Energy Monitoring — Harmonics rms Sensing — 10 Functions — Programmable — Zone Selective Interlocking — Load Monitoring — Diagnostics — Communications — Power and Energy Monitoring — Harmonics 34 35 36 37 38 Optional features. 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-44 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Selection Data — Electronic Trip Units 20 21 22 January 2005 Sheet 0640 Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digitrip Selection Guide Table 21.3-100. Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digitrip Selection Guide Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip RMS 310+ Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes JG, LG 20 – 600 A 35, 65, 100 (kA) R 800 – 2500 A 65, 100 (kA) K, L, N 70 – 2500 A 35, 65, 100 (kA) R 800 – 2500 A 65, 100 (kA) R 800 – 2500 A 65, 100 (kA) R 800 – 2500 A 65, 100 (kA) K, L, N, R 70 – 2500 A 35, 65, 100 (kA) LS LSI LSG LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LSI(A), LISG No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 0.4 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.4 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds Breaker Type Frame K, L, N, R Ampere Range 70 – 2500 A Interrupting Rating at 480 V 35, 65, 100 (kA) 23 Protection Ordering Options LS LSG 24 Fixed Rated Plug (In) Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes LSI LSIG Long Delay Protection (L) 25 Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Yes Long Delay Pickup 0.5 – 1.0(In) Long Delay Time I2t 12 Seconds No No 40 – 100% Frame 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds 2 – 24 Seconds 26 Long Delay Time I4t Long Delay Thermal Memory High Load Alarm No Yes No Yes No Yes 1 – 5 Seconds Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1 – 5 Seconds Yes No Yes No 0.5 – 1.0 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.85 x Ir 0.5 – 1.0 x Ir Short Delay Pickup 200 – 800% x (In) — 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) Short Delay Time I2t Short Delay Time Flat 100 ms No Yes No 100 – 500 ms No Inst – 300 ms No Inst – 300 ms 100 – 500 ms 150 – 800% x (Ir) 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 150 – 800% x (Ir) 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms Short Delay Time Z.S.I. No Yes Yes Yes Yes 200 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) 20 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) 200 – 800% x (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Short Delay Protection (S) 27 28 No Yes Optional No 200 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) 200 – 800% x (In) 200 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) 29 30 31 32 33 Instantaneous Pickup No 200 – 800% x (In) Discriminator Instantaneous Override No Yes No Yes Ground Fault Alarm Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay I2t No var/Frame No No No 20/25 – 100% No No No 20/25 – 100% 20 – 100% Frame 25 – 100% x In 20/25 – 100% 25 – 100% x In 25 – 100% x In 25 – 100% x In 20/25 – 100% No 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Ground Fault Z.S.I. Ground Fault Thermal Memory Ins – 500 ms No Yes — No Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes 100 – 500 ms Optional Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Optional Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) System Diagnostics Cause of Trip LEDs Magnitude of Trip Information Remote Signal Contacts System Monitoring 34 Digital Display Current Voltage No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No 35 Power and Energy Power Quality-Harmonics Power Factor No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes (Over PowerNet Only) Yes Yes Yes 36 Communications No No No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Test Set Test Kit Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet PowerNet Testing 37 Testing Method 38 39 Adjust by rating plug. Must install as field upgrade, or factory option. LS/LSG only. Not to exceed 1200 amperes. L and N Frames *20-100% x Is. R Frame *25-100% x In. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Yes with addition of Energy Sentinel. BIM Is In Ir (A) = = = = = Breaker Interface Module Sensor Rating Rating Plug LDPU Setting x In GF Alarm 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0641 Home TOC << >> Index Internal Accessories Note: Some UL listings pending: refer to Eaton. Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories and Modifications Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch Make Break All internal accessories are of the plug-in type and are listed for field installation under UL File E64983. Internal accessories for sealed circuit breakers are listed under UL File E7819 for factory installation only. The available plug-in accessories include the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 21.3-45 Alarm (Signal)/Lockout Switch Alarm (signal)/lockout switch. Auxiliary switch. Shunt trip. Low energy shunt trip. Undervoltage release mechanism. The alarm (signal)/lockout switch monitors circuit breaker trip status and provides remote signaling and interlocking capabilities when the circuit breaker trips. For 2-, 3- and 4-pole circuit breakers, the alarm (signal)/lockout switch consists of one or two SPDT switches assembled to a plug-in module mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. The SPDT switch contacts are identified as make and break contacts. When the circuit breaker trips, the make contact closes and the break contact opens. Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch The auxiliary switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position of the molded crossbar containing the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for remote signaling and interlocking purposes, and consists of one or two SPDT switches assembled to a plug-in module mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Each SPDT switch has one “a” and one “b” contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the ”a“ contact is open and the “b” contact is closed. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Shunt Trip The shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain ac rated shunt trips are suitable for operation at 55% of rated voltage. ST a Typical Internal Plug-in Accessory Installed in K-Frame Circuit Breaker Different accessory wiring options are available to satisfy most circuit breaker mounting applications. The standard wiring configuration is pigtail leads exiting the rear of the base directly behind the accessory. Optional configurations include a terminal block mounted on the same side of the base as the accessory, leads exiting the side of the base where the accessory is mounted, and leads exiting the rear of the base on the side opposite the accessory. If accessory leads longer than 18 inches (457.2) are required, side-mounted terminal blocks should be used. Available in most ac and dc voltages. Shunt Trip Note: Approximate unlatching time — 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time — 18 milliseconds. Endurance — 4000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. PowerNet Communications Kit Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit provides the option to field install PowerNet communications into a K-, L- or N-Frame OPTIM 550 breaker. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 PowerNet Communications Kit CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-46 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Accessories and Modifications Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0642 Low Energy Shunt Trip 20 ST LE 21 22 23 24 Low energy shunt trip devices are designed to operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism. When a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to 28 Vdc is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the permanent magnet flux field, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Undervoltage Release Mechanism The undervoltage release mechanism monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and 35% of the solenoid coil rating. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (OFF) position. 26 Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. 27 The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever assembled to a plug-in module. With no voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted. UV 25 28 Non-Padlockable Handle Block 30 The nonlockable handle block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle block holds the circuit breaker 31 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 29 32 33 34 35 36 The padlockable handle lock hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. (Field installation only.) trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles. One per circuit breaker. (Field installation only.) Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included) The key interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specific customer installation. 37 The key interlock assembly consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position; key interlock mounting hardware; and a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Block 38 39 The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one 5/16-inch (8.0 mm) padlock. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0643 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-47 Accessories and Modifications Table 21.3-101. Breaker Accessories and Modifications Breaker Frame G F J K L M N 20 R Termination Accessories ● ● Plug Nut ● ● Control Wire Terminal Kit ● ● Line and Load Terminals ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Interphase Barriers ● ● ● ● Multiwire Connectors ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Alarm Lockout (2 Make/2 Break) Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) ● ● ● ● ● ● Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) 23 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Low Energy Shunt Trip ● 26 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Padlockable Handle Block Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp ● ● ● ● Cylinder Lock ● Key Interlock Kit ● ● ● ● ● ● Sliding Bar Interlock ● ● ● ● ● ● Walking Beam Interlock ● ● ● ● ● Electrical (Solenoid) Operator ● ● ● ● ● ● IQ Energy Sentinel ● ● ● LFD Current Limiter ● Plug-in Adapters ● ● ● ● ● ● Rear Connecting Studs ● ● ● ● ● ● Panelboard Connecting Straps ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Door Hardware/Accessories ● Solid-State (Electronic) Test Kit Handle Extension 34 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Moisture Fungus Treatment ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Marine Application ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 31 33 Special Calibration 30 32 Modifications 29 ● Drawout Cassette Handle Mechanisms ● ● Electrical (Motor) Operator 27 28 External Accessories Non-Padlockable Handle Block 25 ● Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B)/Alarm Lockout Undervoltage Release Mechanism ● ● ● Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B)/Alarm Lockout Standard Shunt Trip 24 ● Auxiliary Switch (4A, 4B) Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B)/Alarm Lockout 22 ● Internal Accessories Alarm Lockout (1 Make/1 Break) 21 ● Terminal Shields Base Mounting Hardware ● ● 35 36 37 Make only (one pole). Requires two breakers. Refer to the Eaton. 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-48 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Accessories and Modifications 20 21 Sheet 0644 EG-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Table 21.3-102. Accessories Description 22 January 2005 1-Pole 2-Pole Center Left 3-Pole Right Left 4-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only) 23 24 25 Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) ■ ■ ■ Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination ■ ■ ■ Shunt Trip — Standard ■ ■ Shunt Trip — Low Energy ■ ■ Undervoltage Release Mechanism ■ ■ External Accessories 26 27 28 29 ● ● ● Control Wire Terminal Kit ● ● ● ● Multiwire Connectors ● ● ● ● Base Mounting Hardware ● ● ● ● Terminal Shields ● ● ● ● End Cap Kit ● Terminal End Covers ● Interphase Barriers Non-padlockable Handle Block ■ ■ Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp ■ ■ ● Plug-In Adapters Rear Connecting Studs ● ❏ 32 ❏ ❏ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Moisture Fungus Treatment ● ● ● ● Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers ● ● ● ● Marine Application ● ● ● ■ Applicable in indicated pole position 33 ■ ❏ ● Handle Mechanisms 31 ■ ■ ■ Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Walking Beam Interlock — Requires Two Breakers 30 ● ■ ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole — not both ● ● Accessory available/Modification available 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0645 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-49 Accessories and Modifications JG-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. 21 Table 21.3-103. Accessories Description 20 2- and 3-Pole Left 4-Pole Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) ■ ■ Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) ■ ■ Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) ■ ■ ■ Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination ■ ■ Shunt Trip — Low Energy ■ ■ Undervoltage Release Mechanism ■ ■ 24 25 External Accessories End Cap Kit ● ● Plug Nut ● ● Control Wire Terminal Kit ● ● Multiwire Connectors ● ● Base Mounting Hardware ● ● Terminal Shields ● ● Interphase Barriers ● ● Non-padlockable Handle Block ■ Padlockable Handle Block ■ 26 27 ■ 28 ■ ❏ ❏ Cylinder Lock ❏ ❏ Key Interlock Kit ❏ ❏ 23 ■ Shunt Trip — Standard Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 22 ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Sliding Bar Interlock — Requires Two Breakers ● Electrical Operator ● ● Plug-In Adapters ● ● Rear Connecting Studs ● ● Panelboard Connecting Straps ● ● Handle Mechanisms ● ● Handle Extension ● ● IQ Energy Sentinel ● 29 30 31 32 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special Calibration ● ● Moisture Fungus Treatment ● ● Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers ● ● Marine/Naval Application ● ● ■ Applicable in indicated pole position ❏ May be mounted on left or right pole — not both 33 ● Accessory available/Modification available 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-50 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Application Information 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Circuit Voltage Circuit Frequency Molded case circuit breakers are rated by voltage class and should be applied only to system voltages within their rating. The voltage rating is determined by the maximum voltage that can be applied across its terminals, the type of distribution system and how the breaker is applied in the system. The tripping characteristics of most molded case circuit breakers remain virtually constant when applied to frequencies of 50 and 60 hertz. On higher frequency applications, molded case circuit breakers must usually be specially calibrated and/or derated. The amount of derating depends upon the frame size and ampere rating as well as the current frequency. In general, the higher the ampere rating in a given frame size, the greater the derating required. Circuit breakers listed for use at 120/240 volts may be applied on 120/240 volt grounded systems. For applications on 240 volt ungrounded systems apply only circuit breakers rated 240 volts (with no “slash” rating) or higher. Circuit breakers rated 277/480 volts are suitable for application on 277/480 volt grounded wye systems and are not for application on 480 volt ungrounded delta systems. Apply circuit breakers rated 480 volts (with no “slash” rating) or higher on 480 volt ungrounded delta systems. UL 489 provides standards for testing the individual poles of 2-pole and 3-pole MCCBs. The test current is generally lower than the interrupting rating of the MCCB. This capability is necessary for breakers applied on corner-grounded delta systems where single line-to-ground faults may be interrupted by only a single pole of a circuit breaker with full line-to-line voltage across that single interrupting pole. MCCBs should not be used on circuits where the available fault current exceeds the level at which individual poles were short circuit tested at line-to-line voltage. Note: On all three-phase Delta, grounded B Phase applications, refer to Eaton. Thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers applied at frequencies above 60 hertz could require that individual consideration be given to thermal performance, magnetic performance and interrupting capabilities. Electronic trip units are usually calibrated for 50/60 hertz, although operation at higher frequencies is achievable with the use of special derating factors and specially sized cable or bus. Avoid making circuit breaker performance assumptions on applications above 60 hertz. Consult Eaton for any Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breaker above 60 hertz. Continuous Ampere Rating Molded case circuit breakers are rated in rms amperes at a specific ambient. This ampere rating is the continuous current they will carry in the ambient temperature for which they are calibrated. Cutler-Hammer thermalmagnetic breakers are calibrated for an ambient temperature 40°C (104°F) which is the average temperature within an enclosure; thus, they minimize the need for derating. If the enclosure ambient is known to exceed 40°C, the breaker used should either be especially calibrated for that ambient, or be derated accordingly. Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0646 The selection of a specific ampere rating for a given application is dependent upon the type of load and duty cycle, and is governed by the National Electrical Code. In general, the NEC requires overcurrent protection at the supply and at points where wire sizes are reduced. It further states that the conductors be protected in accordance with their current carrying capacity, but lists exceptions for applications such as motor circuits where a larger rating is often required to override motor inrush currents. Cable Selection UL listed circuit breakers rated 125 A or less shall be marked as being suitable for 60°C (140°F), 75°C (167°F) only or 60/75°C (140/167°F) wire. All Cutler-Hammer listed breakers rated 125 A or less are marked 60/75°C. All UL listed circuit breakers rated over 125 A are suitable for 75°C conductors. Conductors rated for higher temperatures may be used, but must not be loaded to carry more current than the 75°C ampacity of that size conductor for equipment marked or rated 75°C or the 60°C ampacity of that size conductor for equipment marked or rated 60°C. However, the full 90°C (194ºF) ampacity may be used when applying derated factors, so long as the actual load does not exceed the lower of the derated ampacity or the 75°C or 60°C ampacity that applies. 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0647 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breaker Sizing Considerations The following paragraphs outline pertinent information from the NEC according to the type of load and duty cycle. A. Service A service includes the conductors and equipment for delivering electrical energy from the supply system to the wiring system of the premises served. NEC Article 230 contains the many requirements for services of 600 volts or less including the sizing, location and overcurrent protection of conductors, disconnect means, permissible number of disconnects, grounding of conductors, and ground fault protection requirements of service equipment. B. Feeder Circuits A feeder is composed of the conductors of a wiring system between the service equipment or the generator switchboard of an isolated plant and the branch circuit overcurrent device. NEC Article 220: Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. Exception: Where the assembly including the overcurrent devices protecting the feeder(s) are listed for operation at 100% of their rating, neither the ampere rating of the overcurrent device nor the ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be less than the sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load. Only breakers listed for 100% application, and so labeled, can be applied under the exception (for example, type CKD). Breakers without 100% application listing and label are applied under (B) above, or at 80% of rating. NEC Article 430: Breakers for feeders having mixed loads; i.e., heating (lighting and heat appliances) and motors, should have ratings suitable for carrying the heating loads plus the capacity required by the motor loads. NEC Article 430: Breakers for motor feeders shall have a rating not greater than the sum of the highest breaker rating of any of its branches and the full load currents of all other motors served by the feeder. Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 21.3-51 Application Information C. Branch Circuits A branch circuit is the portion of a wiring system extending beyond the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit. (1) Lighting Circuits (NEC Article 310) These are protected in accordance with the conductor ratings as given. High wattage incandescent lamp loads may result in abnormally high inrush currents that must be taken into account to avoid nuisance tripping. The lamp manufacturer should be consulted for data relative to the inrush currents. (2) Motor Circuits (NEC Article 430) Breakers are primarily intended for the protection of conductors, motor control apparatus and motors against short circuits and ground fault conditions. On motor overloads, the motor overcurrent device will open the circuit before the correctly applied breaker. Currents higher than the locked rotor value will be interrupted by the breakers, protecting the circuit from these heavy fault currents. The breaker must not trip on normal starting. While breakers may be applied for motor running overcurrent protection when the requirements of Article 430 of the NEC are met, these applications are not recommended for Eaton’s CutlerHammer breakers and, therefore, this discussion is confined to the use of a breaker as a circuit protector. For many applications, particularly those where starting behavior of the motor is unknown, the NEC maximum rules are followed. Usually, lower rated breakers can be used successfully. This is further discussed under motor circuit application and motor application tables. Motor Circuit Application (NEC Article 430): The breaker must have a continuous rating of not less than 115% of the motor full load current. Before applying a breaker, one should check to determine the effect of any of the following conditions: High ambient temperature, heating within breaker enclosure due to grouping of current consuming devices, frequent motor starting, and lengthy motor acceleration period. Breaker Rating or Setting (NEC Article 430): The motor branch circuit overcurrent device shall be capable of the motor. The required protection shall be considered as being obtained when the overcurrent device has a rating or setting not exceeding the values given in Table 21.3-104, reference NEC Article 430). An instantaneous trip circuit breaker (without time delay) shall be used only if adjustable and if part of a combination controller having overcurrent protection in each conductor and the combination is especially approved for the purpose. In the event a breaker chosen on this basis still does not allow motor starting, a higher rating is permitted by the code. See Exceptions listed with Table 21.3-104. Due to the infinite number of motorand-load combinations and because comparable breakers of different manufacture have different tripping characteristics, NEC motor circuit breaker rules are of a general nature and are set up as maximum boundaries. Protection is considered satisfactory if the breaker rating does not exceed the figure allowed by the NEC requirements. Although Cutler-Hammer breakers rated less than the NEC maximum values may be applied in most cases. Many operating engineers select breakers on the basis of the NEC maximum rules simply because consideration of other factors is not usually necessary, or to ensure motor starting when the starting behavior of the motor is not known. Tables 21.3-104 and 21.3-105 are adapted from Article 430 of NEC. When a certain motor is standard for a given job, as on a volume produced machine tool, it is practical (and often more economical) to select a breaker for closer protection than one chosen on the basis of NEC maximum rules. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-52 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Application Information 20 << >> January 2005 Sheet 0648 Percent of Full Load Current Instantaneous Trip Breaker 21 23 Index Table 21.3-104. Maximum Rating or Setting of Motor Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and Ground Fault Protective Devices — NEC Table 430-152 Type of Motor 22 TOC Single-Phase Motors ac Polyphase Motors other than Wound Rotor Squirrel Cage: Other than Design E Design E Synchronous Wound Rotor Direct-Current (Constant Voltage) 24 25 Inverse Time Breaker 800 250 800 1100 800 800 250 250 250 250 150 150 For certain exceptions to the values specified, see Sections 430-52 through 430-54. The values given in the last column also cover the ratings of nonadjustable inverse time types of circuit breakers that may be modified as in Section 430-52. Synchronous motors of the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450 rpm or lower), such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps, etc., that start unloaded, do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of 200 percent of full load current. Table 21.3-105. Full-Load Current Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors — NEC Table 430-150 26 Hp Induction Type Squirrel-Cage and Wound-Rotor Amperes 115 Volts Synchronous Type Unity Power Factor Amperes 200 Volts 208 Volts 230 Volts 460 Volts 575 Volts 2300 Volts 230 Volts 460 Volts 575 Volts 2300 Volts 4.4 6.4 8.4 2.5 3.7 4.8 2.4 3.5 4.6 2.2 3.2 4.2 1.1 1.6 2.1 0.9 1.3 1.7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1-1/2 12.0 2 13.6 3 — 6.9 7.8 11.0 6.6 7.5 10.6 6.0 6.8 9.6 3.0 3.4 4.8 2.4 2.7 3.9 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 5 — 7-1⁄2 — 10 — 17.5 25.3 32.2 16.7 24.2 30.8 15.2 22 28 7.6 11 14 6.1 9 11 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 15 20 25 — — — 48.3 62.1 78.2 46.2 59.4 74.8 42 54 68 21 27 34 17 22 27 — — — — — 53 — — 26 — — 21 — — — 30 40 50 — — — 92 120 150 88 114 143 80 104 130 40 52 65 32 41 52 — — — 63 83 104 32 41 52 26 33 42 — — — 32 60 75 100 — — — 177 221 285 169 211 273 154 192 248 77 96 124 62 77 99 16 20 26 123 155 202 61 78 101 49 62 81 12 15 20 33 125 150 200 — — — 359 414 552 343 396 528 312 360 480 156 180 240 125 144 192 31 37 49 253 302 400 126 151 201 101 121 161 25 30 40 34 250 300 350 — — — — — — — — — — — — 302 361 414 242 289 336 60 72 83 — — — — — — — — — — — — 400 450 500 — — — — — — — — — — — — 477 515 590 382 412 472 95 103 118 — — — — — — — — — — — — 35 27 1/2 3/4 1 28 29 30 31 36 37 The following values of full load currents are typical for motors running at speeds usual for belted motors and motors with normal torque characteristics. Motors built for low speeds (1200 RPM or less) or high torques may require more running current, and multispeed motors will have full-load current varying with speed. In these cases the nameplate current rating shall be used. The voltages listed are rated motor voltages. The currents listed shall be permitted for system voltage ranges of 110 to 120, 220 to 240, 440 to 480, and 550 to 600 volts. For 90 and 80 percent power factor, the above figures shall be multiplied by 1.1 and 1.25 respectively. 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0649 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index C. Capacitor Protection (NEC Article 460) In normal applications, breakers rated about 150% of capacitor rated currents are recommended. This factor allows for switching surges, and possible overcurrent due to overvoltage and harmonic currents. Such selection fully meets the NEC requirements in 460-8 for a conductor and disconnect to be rated not less than 135% capacitor rating. Where the operating currents exceed 135% of rated current due to harmonic components, service conditions may require the selection of a breaker with a higher current rating. Application Information — Capacitor Protection Table 21.3-106. Recommended Switching Devices Enclosed Capacitor Rating Amperes Volts Capacitor Rating Current 240 For application in ambients higher than the rated ambient of the breaker, the breaker derating table should be checked to determine the rating of the breaker required to meet the minimum of 135% capacitor rating. Circuit breakers and switches for use with capacitor must have a current rating in excess of rated capacitor current to provide for overcurrent from overvoltages at fundamental frequency and harmonic currents. The following percent of the capacitor-rated current should be used: Fused and unfused switches . . . 165% 21.3-53 480 Enclosed Molded Case Circuit Breaker (Includes additional de-rating for enclosures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% Air circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . 135% Contactors: Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135% Enclosed type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% kvar 2-1/2 5 7-1/2 20 Safety Switch Fuse Rating MCCB Trip Rating Air Breaker Trip Rating 21 6 12 18 15 20 30 15 20 30 15 20 30 10 15 20 24.1 36.1 48.1 40 60 80 40 70 90 40 50 70 25 30 45 60 72.2 108 100 125 200 100 125 175 90 100 150 50 60 75 120 144 180 200 250 300 200 225 275 175 200 250 24 90 100 120 217 240 289 400 400 500 350 400 500 300 350 400 25 125 135 150 301 325 361 500 600 600 500 500 600 450 500 500 26 180 200 225 433 480 541 800 800 900 700 800 900 600 700 800 240 250 270 578 602 650 1000 1000 1200 900 900 1000 800 900 1000 300 360 375 720 866 903 1200 1600 1500 — — — 1200 1200 1200 2 5 7-1/2 2.41 6.01 9 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 22 23 27 28 29 10 15 20 12 18 24 20 30 40 20 30 40 20 30 40 30 25 30 35 30 36.1 42 50 60 70 50 70 70 50 50 60 31 40 45 5 48.1 54 60.1 80 90 10 100 100 100 70 80 90 32 60 75 80 72.2 90.2 96.2 125 150 175 125 150 150 100 125 150 33 90 100 108 120 200 200 175 200 150 175 120 125 150 144 150 180 250 250 300 225 225 300 200 200 25 160 180 200 192 216 241 350 400 400 300 350 400 300 300 350 35 225 240 250 271 289 301 500 500 500 500 500 500 400 400 400 36 300 320 360 361 385 433 600 700 800 600 600 700 500 600 600 37 375 400 450 451 481 541 800 800 900 700 800 900 600 800 800 38 Switching device ratings are based on percentage of capacitor-rated current as indicated. The interrupting rating of the switch must be selected to match the system fault current available at the point of capacitor application. Whenever a capacitor bank is purchased with less than the ultimate kvar capacity of the rack or enclosure, the switch rating should be selected based on the ultimate kvar capacity — not the initial installed capacity. 34 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-54 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Application Information — Transformer Protection 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 E. Transformer Protection (NEC Article 450) Primary Each transformer 600 volts or less shall be protected by an individual overcurrent device on the primary side. Rated or set at not more than 125% of the rated primary current of the transformer. Exception No. 1: Where the rated primary currents of a transformer is 9 amperes or more and 125% of this current does not correspond to a standard rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the next higher standard rating described in Section 240 shall be permitted. Where the rated primary current is less than 9 amperes, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 167% of the primary current shall be permitted. Where the rated primary current is less than 2 amperes, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 300% shall be permitted. Exception No. 2: An individual overcurrent device shall not be required where the primary circuit overcurrent device provides the protection specified in this Section. Exception 4: Where the rated secondary current of a transformer is 9 amperes or more and 125% of this current does not correspond to a standard rating of a fuse or nonadjustable circuit breaker, the next higher standard rating described in Section 240 shall be permitted. A transformer 600 volts or less having an overcurrent device on the secondary side rated or set at not more than 125% of the rated secondary current on the transformer shall not be required to have an individual overcurrent device on the primary side if the primary feeder overcurrent device is rated or set at a current value not more than 250% of the rated primary current of the transformer. A transformer 600 volts or less, equipped with coordinated thermal overload protection by the manufacturer and arranged to interrupt the primary current, shall not be required to have an individual overcurrent device on the primary side if the primary feeder overcurrent device is rated or set at a current value not more than 6 times the rated current of the transformer for transformers having more than 6% impedance and not more than 4 times the rated current of the transformer for transformers having more than 6 but not more than 10% impedance. Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0650 Where the rated secondary current is less than 9 amperes, an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 167% of the rated secondary current shall be permitted. Closer protection can be provided by breakers having shunt trips actuated by a temperature sensing device imbedded in transformer windings. Table 21.3-107. Single-Phase Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided kVA 208 V FLA 240 V 277 V Breaker FLA Trip Breaker FLA Trip 480 V Breaker FLA Trip 600 V Breaker FLA Trip Breaker Trip 2 3 5 10 14 24 20 30 50 8 13 21 20 30 50 7 11 18 15 20 40 5 6 10 10 15 20 4 5 8 7.5 10 15 36 48 72 70 100 150 31 42 63 60 80 125 27 36 54 50 70 100 16 21 31 30 40 60 13 17 25 30 40 50 25 37.5 50 120 180 240 225 350 450 104 156 208 200 300 400 90 135 181 175 250 350 52 78 104 100 150 200 42 63 83 100 150 150 75 100 167 361 481 803 700 1000 1600 313 417 696 600 800 1200 271 361 603 500 700 1200 156 208 348 300 400 700 125 167 278 250 350 600 250 333 500 1202 1601 2404 2000 3000 3200 1042 1388 2083 1600 2000 3000 903 1202 1805 1600 2000 2500 521 694 1042 800 1200 1600 417 555 833 800 800 1200 — 10 20 Table 21.3-108. Single-Phase Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided kVA Exception No. 3: As provided in (b) (2) below. (2) Primary and Secondary TOC 208 V FLA 240 V Breaker Trip FLA 277 V Breaker Trip 2 3 5 10 14 24 15 20 30 8 13 21 15 20 30 7.5 10 15 36 48 72 45 60 90 31 42 63 25 37.5 50 120 180 240 150 225 300 75 100 167 361 481 803 250 333 500 1202 1601 2404 480 V FLA Breaker Trip FLA Breaker Trip — — — — — — 11 18 15 25 10 15 40 60 80 27 36 54 35 50 70 16 21 31 20 30 40 104 156 208 150 200 300 90 135 181 150 175 225 52 78 104 70 100 150 450 600 1000 313 417 696 400 600 900 271 361 603 350 450 800 156 208 348 200 300 450 1600 2000 3000 1042 1388 2083 1400 1800 3000 903 1202 1805 1200 1600 2500 521 694 1042 700 900 1400 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0651 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index Application Information Interrupting Rating Table 21.3-109. Three-Phase Primary Protection When Secondary Protection Provided kVA 240 V 480 V FLA Breaker Trip 3 6 9 7 14 22 15 30 40 15 30 37.5 36 72 90 45 50 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 7550 1000 21.3-55 600 V FLA Breaker Trip FLA Breaker Trip — — — — 7 11 15 25 6 9 15 20 70 150 200 18 36 45 40 70 90 14 29 36 30 60 70 108 120 180 200 225 350 54 60 90 110 120 200 43 48 72 90 100 150 271 361 541 500 700 1000 135 180 271 250 350 500 108 144 217 200 300 400 722 1203 1804 2406 1000 2000 2500 4000 361 601 902 1203 600 800 1200 2000 289 481 722 962 500 700 1000 1600 The maximum amount of fault current supplied by a system can be calculated at any point in that system. One rule must be followed for applying the correct circuit breaker. The interrupting rating of the breaker must be equal to or greater than the amount of fault current that can be delivered at that point in the system where the breaker is applied. The interrupting rating of the breaker is the maximum amount of fault current it can safely interrupt without damaging itself. A breaker’s interrupting rating always decreases as the voltage increases. Interrupting rating is one of the most critical factors in the breaker selection process. Table 21.3-110. Three-Phase Secondary Protection When Primary Protection Provided kVA 208 V FLA 240 V Breaker Trip FLA 480 V Breaker Trip 3 6 9 8 17 25 10 20 35 7 14 22 10 20 30 15 30 37.5 42 83 104 60 110 150 36 72 90 45 50 75 125 139 208 175 175 300 112.5 150 225 312 416 652 833 1388 2082 2776 300 500 750 1000 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Number of Poles 600 V FLA Breaker Trip FLA Breaker Trip — — — — — — 7 11 10 15 9 10 45 100 125 18 36 45 25 45 60 14 29 36 20 40 50 108 120 180 150 175 225 54 60 90 70 80 125 43 48 72 60 60 90 400 600 800 271 361 541 350 500 700 135 180 271 175 225 350 108 144 217 150 200 300 1200 1800 3000 3500 722 1203 1804 2406 900 1500 2500 3000 361 601 902 1203 500 800 1200 1600 289 481 722 962 400 600 900 1200 The number of poles in the breaker is determined by the type of distribution system. A pole is required for each hot conductor, but usually not for the neutral conductor, except in certain special applications. 27 In general, a 1-pole breaker may be used on grounded neutral systems for single-phase applications and a 3-pole breaker on 3-phase applications. There are instances, however, where 2-pole breakers are necessary on singlephase systems and 4-pole breakers on 3-phase systems to interrupt the neutral. Certain dc voltage applications also use special multi-pole configurations. 29 Fixed or Interchangeable Trip Unit Reverse Feed Applications (Power Supply to Load Side) Often due to physical equipment arrangements in panelboards and switchboards, it is desirable to reverse feed a molded case circuit breaker. For this application, circuit breakers must be tested and listed accordingly. For safety reasons, thermal-magnetic circuit breakers having interchangeable trip units are not acceptable for this application, and are, therefore, marked “Line” and “Load” on the cover. Where circuit breakers are so marked, the power source conductors must be connected to the “Line” end terminations. Circuit breakers suitable for reverse feed application generally have sealed covers and not marked “Line” and “Load” and are UL listed. 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-56 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Application Information — Unusual Operating Conditions 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Unusual Operating Conditions Trip Unit Temperatures Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Thermalmagnetic circuit breakers are temperature sensitive. At ambient temperatures below 40°C (104ºF), circuit breakers carry more current than their continuous current rating. Nuisance tripping is not a problem under these lower temperature conditions, although consideration should be given to closer protection coordination to compensate for the additional current carrying capability. In addition, the actual mechanical operation of the breaker could be affected if the ambient temperature is significantly below the 40°C standard. 36 37 38 39 40 Breaker Ampere Rating at 40°C 25°C (77°F) 50°C (122°F) 60°C (140°F) 15 20 25 17 22 32 13 18 21 11 16 16 30 35 40 33 41 45 27 32 34 24 27 29 50 60 70 55 66 77 46 56 65 42 52 60 90 100 125 150 99 110 137 165 84 94 116 138 78 87 105 125 70 90 100 79 102 115 63 81 89 55 71 76 125 150 175 140 171 200 114 134 156 102 116 134 200 225 250 230 252 281 178 205 227 153 183 201 100 125 150 121 145 188 90 116 132 79 106 111 175 200 225 210 243 255 159 180 212 141 157 198 250 300 350 400 294 364 412 471 230 270 322 368 208 236 291 333 300 350 400 330 385 440 276 325 372 252 301 340 500 600 550 660 468 564 435 525 300 350 400 332 388 444 277 322 368 252 292 334 450 500 600 495 550 660 418 468 564 383 435 525 700 800 770 880 658 754 613 704 J-Frame/J250-Frame Electronic trip units are insensitive to ambient temperatures within a certain temperature range. The temperature range for most Cutler-Hammer electronic trip units is -20°C to +55°C (-4ºF to 131ºF). However, at very low ambient temperatures, the mechanical parts of the breaker could require special treatment, such as the use of special lubricants. If the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C significantly, damage to the electronic circuitry and other components could result. Eaton includes temperature protective circuits in its designs to initiate a tripping operation and provide self-protection, should the internal temperature rise to an unsafe level. K-Frame The temperature of the air surrounding a circuit breaker is the ambient temperature. For some years, all molded case circuit breakers were calibrated for 25°C (77°F). This ambient temperature was not very representative of the conditions in which most molded case circuit breakers were applied, namely in an enclosure. In the mid-1960s, industry standards were changed to make all standard breakers calibrated to a 40°C ambient temperature. For any ambient temperature application above or below 40°C, it is recommended that the breaker manufacturer be consulted as to any possible rerating, recalibration or special procedures, before the circuit breaker is selected and applied. Ampere Rating F-Frame/E125-Frame For ambient temperatures above 40°C, breakers will carry less current than their continuous current rating. This condition promotes nuisance tripping and can create unacceptable temperature conditions at the terminals. Under this condition, the circuit breaker should be recalibrated for the higher ambient temperature. Circuit Breaker Temperatures 35 Table 21.3-111. Derating Chart for NonCompensated Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Calibrated for 40°C L-Frame M-Frame For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0652 Moisture — Corrosion High moisture content and/or the presence of corrosive elements can result in damage to key operating components and/or severely compromise the breaker’s operational integrity. As is the case with all electrical equipment, this type of condition or environment should be avoided. Good electrical practice dictates that electrical equipment always be applied in a clean environment, free of moisture and corrosion. If such operating conditions cannot be avoided, special treatment of the circuit breaker should be considered to minimize the possibility of operational problems. Most CutlerHammer molded case circuit breaker cases are molded from glass polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. In addition, a special moisture and fungus-resisting treatment is recommended for any parts that are susceptible to the growth of fungus. In areas where daily temperature changes have a tendency to cause condensation, the inclusion of space heaters in the enclosure is the best preventative measure. The manufacturer should be consulted if either one of these operational environments is likely to exist. Consider the addition of a Cutler-Hammer C799 series oxidation inhibiting capsule in the assembly. Altitude Low voltage circuit breakers must be progressively derated for voltage, current carrying and interrupting rating at altitudes above 6,000 feet (1,829 m). The thinner air at higher altitudes reduces cooling and dielectric characteristics compared to the denser air found at lower altitudes. Refer to Eaton for additional application details. Shock/Vibration Where high shock is an anticipated condition, hi-shock Navy type breakers are recommended. Molded case circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46, ABS – American Bureau of Shipping, IEEE 45, UL 489 Supplement SA Marine, and UL 489 Supplemental SB Naval. CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0653 Home TOC << >> Index Special Applications Molded Case Breakers for Application on Resistance Welding Circuits Short circuit protection for resistance welding devices can be obtained by properly applying instantaneous trip molded case circuit breakers. Note: Instantaneous only breakers for welding application are intended for application within the welding equipment not as feeder breakers to welding machines. These breakers permit normally high welding currents, but trip instantaneously if a short circuit develops. These breakers include standard molded case circuit breaker features such as trip-free operation, deadfront and single-phase protection. Because the breakers are resettable after tipping, replacement costs and downtime are minimized. Duty Cycle is based on the one minute averaging time of the breaker, and can be determined as follows: Weld Time × 100 Duty Cycle = ---------------------------------------------------------Weld Time + Off Time “During-weld” amperes can be obtained from the welder manufacturer, or as follows: During-weld × 1000 kVA During-weld = --------------------------------------------------Amperes Voltage Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 21.3-57 Application Information — Special Applications Mining Service Circuit Breakers Application and Replacement of Breakers The full line of mining service circuit breakers includes Standard ”Classic” Mining Service, Series C and E2G Mining Breaker, including 1000Y/577 Vac ratings. Mining breakers are available with a full line of accessories. These special purpose circuit breakers are designed specifically for underground trailing cable application per MSHA 30 CFR 75. Apply and replace breakers prudently, within the design and operating parameters of the power system. Use the following tables to select the size and type of Series C Circuit Breaker needed to fit virtually any application in series connected and other protective systems. Series C Breakers are highly compatible across ratings, capacities and characteristic; prudent replacements are as important as initial selection. 20 Unusual Mounting Configurations 24 Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Engine generator molded case circuit breakers are designed specifically for application on diesel engine powered standby generators where high interrupting circuit breakers are not required. Engine generator circuit breakers conform to UL 489, CSA and IEC 947-2. Molded Case Switches The molded case switch is used when a compact, high capacity disconnect switch is required. It provides no overcurrent protection, overload or low level fault. The MCS is equipped with a high instantaneous magnetic fixed trip unit. The fixed magnetic trip is factory preset to interrupt high fault currents at or above its preset level. MCS is self protecting within its withstand rating. The molded case switch accepts the same accessories as the equivalent thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. See Table 21.3-112. Generally, circuit breakers may be mounted in any position, up or down, horizontal or vertical, without affecting the tripping characteristics or interrupting rating. However, mounting circuit breakers in a vertical position with the “ON” position other than “UP” will be in violation of Article 240-81 of the National Electrical Code. 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Interrupting capacity of the breaker should be within the maximum available at the point of application. Refer to Eaton for additional application details. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-58 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Application Information — Molded Case Switch Ratings 20 21 Table 21.3-112. Molded Case Switch Short Circuit Current Ratings at 60 Hz Only (Maximum Fault Current at Which Device can be Applied in kAIC) MCS Catalog Number Short Circuit Current Rating 240 V TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0654 (Continued) 600 V 250 Vdc MCS Catalog Number Short Circuit Current Rating 480 V 240 V 480 V 600 V 250 Vdc GD3060K GD3100K EHD2100K 65 65 18 22 22 14 — — — 10 10 10 KDB4400KW HKD2400KW HKDB2400KW 65 100 100 35 65 65 25 35 35 10 22 22 EHD3100K FD2100KL FD2150KL 18 65 65 14 25 25 — 18 18 10 10 10 HKD3400KW HKDB3400KW HKD4400KW 100 100 100 65 65 65 35 35 35 22 22 22 FD3100KL FD3150KL FD4100KL 65 65 65 25 25 25 18 18 18 10 10 10 HKDB4400KW LD2600WK LDB2600WK 100 65 65 65 35 35 35 25 25 22 10 10 FD4150KL HFD2100KL HFD2150KL 65 100 100 25 65 65 18 25 25 10 22 22 LD3600WK LDB3600WK LD4600WK 65 65 65 35 35 35 25 25 25 10 10 10 25 HFD3100KL HFD3150KL HFD4100KL 100 100 100 65 65 65 25 25 25 22 22 22 LDB4600WK HLD2600WK HLDB2600WK 65 100 100 35 65 65 25 35 35 10 25 25 26 HFD4150KL JD2250KW JDB2250KW 100 65 65 65 25 25 25 18 18 22 10 10 HLD3600WK HLDB3600WK HLD4600WK 100 100 100 65 65 65 35 35 35 25 25 25 JD3250KW JDB3250KW JD4250KW 65 65 65 25 25 25 18 18 18 10 10 10 HLDB4600WK MDL2800WK MDL3800WK 100 42 42 65 35 35 35 22 22 25 20 20 28 JDB4250KW HJD2250KW HJDB2250KW 65 100 100 25 65 65 18 25 25 10 22 22 MDLS2800WK MDLS3800WK ND3800WK 42 42 65 35 35 50 22 22 25 20 20 — 29 HJD3250KW HJDB3250KW HJD4250KW 100 100 100 65 65 65 25 25 25 22 22 22 ND4800WK HND3800WK HND4800WK 65 100 100 50 65 65 25 35 35 — — — HJDB4250KW DK2400KW DK3400KW 100 65 65 65 — — 25 — — 22 10 10 ND312WK ND412WK HND312WK 65 65 100 50 50 65 25 25 35 — — — KD2400KW KDB2400KW KD3400KW 65 65 65 35 35 35 25 25 25 10 10 10 HND412WK RD316WK RD320WK 100 125 125 65 65 65 35 50 50 — — — KDB3400KW KD4400KW 65 65 35 35 25 25 10 10 RD420WK — 125 125 65 65 50 50 — — 22 23 24 27 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0655 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index Application Information — DC Circuit Breakers DC Circuit Breakers Interrupting Capacity Ratings UL listed Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer DC Molded Case Circuit Breakers are for use in general dc circuits. They are also used in ungrounded battery supply circuits of UPS systems which provide continuous reliable ac power to computer-controlled applications for financial institutions and telecommunications. These devices are an excellent alternative to molded case switches and fuses because they are easier to install and require less maintenance. Table 21.3-113. UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings All DC breakers are designed specifically for use in ungrounded dc circuits. The various dc voltage ratings are obtained by connecting one, two, three, or four poles in series as noted. Connection diagrams are shown on the breaker nameplate. The DC breakers use the same internal and external accessories as the standard breakers for ac application. Shorting straps for series connecting poles are available. Molded case circuit breakers for transportation application requiring 750 Vdc are available 15 through 2500 amperes with 20 kA interrupting capacity at 750 Vdc. Breakers require 4 poles in series for 750 Vdc application. However, 750 V is not a UL rating. Dimensions are the same as the standard thermal-magnetic equivalent. 21.3-59 Circuit Breaker Type Frame HFDDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC NBDC PBDC 20 Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA) Volts dc 125 250 600 750 150 250 400 42 42 42 42 42 42 35 35 35 42 20 20 600 1200 2500 42 42 42 42 50 75 35 50 75 20 20 20 dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. 8 millisecond time constant. 1-pole in series. 2-poles in series. 3-poles in series. 4 poles in series. Not a UL listed voltage rating. 21 22 23 24 25 3-Poles in Series for dc (Typical) 4-Poles in Series 26 LOAD 27 28 29 LOAD LOAD Figure 21.3-5. Series Connection Diagrams for 600 Volts dc Application 30 31 Note: Use rated cable per NEC. Connect to terminals as per breaker nameplate. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-60 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Application Information — 400 – 415 Hz 20 21 22 23 24 25 Application of Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers to 400 – 415 Hz Systems Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers, including breakers with electronic trip units, can be applied for overcurrent protection on 400 – 415 Hz systems. Commonly used to power computer installations, 400 – 415 Hz systems are also employed in conjunction with certain aircraft, military and other specialty equipment. This publication contains guidelines to applying Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers on 400 – 415 Hz systems. Circuit Breaker Derating Required Table 21.3-114, lists the maximum continuous current carrying capacity at 400 – 415 Hz of Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers. Due to the increased resistance of the copper sections resulting from the skin effect produced by eddy currents at 400 – 415 Hz, circuit breakers in many cases require derating. Sheet 0656 The thermal derating on these devices is based upon 100%, 3-phase application in open air in a maximum of 40°C (104ºF) with 4 feet (1.2 m) of the specified cable 75°C (167ºF) of bus at the line and load side. Additional derating of not less than 20% will be required if the circuit breaker is to be utilized in an enclosure. Further derating may be required if the enclosure contains other heat generating devices or if the ambient temperatures exceed 40°C. Table 21.3-114. Continuous Current of 400 Hz Breakers Breaker Frame Series EHD, FDB, FD Maximum Continuous Amperes at 60 Hz 400 – 415 Hz Application Maximum Continuous Amperes Cable/Bus Bar (Per Phase) Terminals (Fixed Front) Catalog or Style Number 26 15 20 25 15 20 25 1 #12 Cu 1 #12 Cu 1 #12 Cu 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 27 30 35 40 30 35 40 1 #10 Cu 1 #10 Cu 1 #8 Cu 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 50 70 90 45 65 85 1 #6 Cu 1 #4 Cu 1 #2 Cu 624B100G02 624B100G02 624B100G02 100 125 150 95 115 135 1 #1 Cu 1 – 1/0 Cu 1 – 1/0 Cu 624B100G17 624B100G17 624B100G17 1 #4 Cu 1 #2 Cu 1 #1 Cu T250KB T250KB T250KB 28 29 January 2005 70 90 100 60 80 90 30 125 150 175 100 125 150 1 – 1/0 Cu 1 – 1/0 Cu 1 – 2/0 Cu T250KB T250KB T250KB 31 200 225 250 160 200 200 1 – 3/0 Cu 1 – 4/0 Cu 1 – 250 kcmil Cu T250KB T250KB T250KB 125 150 175 100 125 150 1 – 1/0 Cu 1 – 1/0 Cu 1 – 2/0 Cu T300K T300K T300K 33 200 225 250 160 180 200 1 – 3/0 Cu 1 – 4/0 Cu 1 – 250 kcmil Cu T300K T300K T300K 34 300 350 400 225 275 300 1 – 350 kcmil Cu 1 – 500 kcmil Cu 2 – 3/0 Cu T300K T350K T400K 250 300 350 210 240 275 1 – 250 kcmil Cu 1 – 350 kcmil Cu 1 – 500 kcmil Cu T600LA T600LA T600LA 400 500 600 310 370 425 2 – 250 kcmil Cu 2 – 350 kcmil Cu 2 – 500 kcmil Cu T600LA T600LA T600LA LD with Digitrip RMS 310 300 600 300 500 2 – 250 kcmil Cu 2 – 350 kcmil Cu T401LA T401LA MD with Digitrip RMS 310 400 500 600 340 405 470 2 – 3/0 Cu 2 – 300 kcmil Cu 2 – 350 kcmil Cu 601MA T601MA T601MA 700 800 355 400 2 – 4/0 Cu 2 – 300 kcmil Cu T601MA T601MA ND with Digitrip RMS 310 1200 700 750 85 3 – 300 kcmil Cu 3 – 350 kcmil Cu 4 – 350 kcmil Cu T1000 NBI T1000 NBI T1200 NBI RD with Digitrip RMS 310 2000 1500 4-1/2 x 4 Cu Rear Connected Cu T-Bar 32 JDB, JD, HJD KDB, KD, HKD LDB, LD, HLD 35 36 37 38 39 40 The calibration of these breakers and the tolerance percentages of the time-current curves are the same as at 60 Hz. FD and HFD only. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0657 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index Application Information — 400 – 415 Hz Cable and Bus Sizing 400 – 415 Hz Breakers The cable and bus sizes to be utilized at 400 – 415 Hz are not based on standard National Electrical Code tables for 60 Hz application. Larger cross sections are necessary at 400 – 415 Hz to avoid exceeding component temperature limits. All bus bars specified are based upon mounting the bars in the vertical plane to allow maximum air flow. All bus bars are spaced at a minimum of 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) apart. Mounting of bus bars in the horizontal plane will necessitate additional drafting. Edgewise orientation of the bus may change the maximum ratings indicated. If additional information is required for other connections of cable or bus, contact the Eaton Customer Support Center. When required, molded case circuit breakers may be factory calibrated for 400 – 415 Hz application. These breakers are specially labeled for 400 – 415 Hz usage and their nameplate current rating will include the necessary derating factor. The highest “Maximum Continuous Amperes” rating at 400 – 415 Hz found in Tables A and B is approximately equal to the highest specially calibrated 400 – 415 Hz nameplate amperes rating available for a given frame size. The EHD, FDB and FD frames have style numbers designated for breakers calibrated at 400 – 415 Hz. Contact Eaton for ordering information on other Cutler-Hammer breakers to be applied in 400 – 415 Hz systems. Breaker Frame Series 240 V 480 V 600 V Thermal Magnetic 2,800 2,800 5,000 — 2,800 3,600 Interrupting Capacity JDB, JD HJD KDB, KD, HKD 8,000 14,000 21,000 7,000 10,000 11,000 7,000 7,000 8,000 400 – 415 Hz interrupting capacities of the Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers found in Table 21.3-115. LDB, LD HLD MD 14,000 21,000 14,000 10,000 11,000 10,000 7,000 8,000 7,000 Electronic Trip Units LD, MD, ND HLD 14,000 21,000 10,000 11,000 7,000 8,000 HND RD 21,000 40,000 16,000 33,000 8,000 33,000 21 22 Estimated 400 – 415 Hz Interrupting Capacities (rms Symmetrical Amperes) 3,600 3,600 13,000 It is recommended that thermal indicating devices such as “tempi plates” be placed on the line and load terminals or T-connectors of the center pole. These are usually the hottest terminals with a balanced load. A maximum temperature of 90°C (50°C over a maximum ambient of 40°C) would verify the maximum rating for the particular application. Temperature profiles taken on these breakers can be correlated to insure that the hottest points within the breaker care are within the required temperature limits. A thermal cutoff switch can also be used to actuate a shunt trip to open the breaker if the thermal limits are exceeded. Consult the Customer Support Center for further information on special applications. 20 23 Table 21.3-115. Interrupting Capacities of 400 Hz Breakers EHD FDB FD Application Recommendations 21.3-61 The above interrupting ratings are estimates based on the design parameters and operating characteristics of each breaker as well as on the limited amount of test data thus far available for circuit breakers applied to 400 – 415 Hz systems. Not UL listed. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-62 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 100% Rated Circuit Breakers The NEC The amount of protection designed into a distribution system is often based on economics. However, each project should be furnished with a reliable distribution system that delivers the most effective protection possible for each investment dollar. The rules and intent of the National Electrical Code governing the use of standard or 100% rated breakers must be understood before recommending or applying such devices. Reliable and economic system design can be usually achieved with Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers that are UL listed for application at 100% of their ratings — instead of standard breakers that in actual use are applied at 80% of their frame ratings in an enclosure. The concept between a system design using standard breakers and that using 100% rated breakers is uncomplicated — but there are no shortcut methods for determining which design (and devices) is the best choice for a given system. Good engineering practice requires a careful system analysis beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with the main device. Also included in the system analysis must be all present and future factors that could affect the size and/or quantity of the breakers and associated hardware, such as switchboard bus, busway, cable and conduit. Other factors to consider are loads (continuous and noncontinuous) and system expansions and transformers with provisions for forced air cooling. Section 220-10(b) Continuous and Noncontinuous Loads of the National Electrical Code addresses differences between applications of standard rated breakers and 100% rated breakers. (Significant sections are in bold face type.) “Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load.” The minimum circuit conductor size without the application of any ampacity adjustment or correction factors shall have an allowable ampacity equal to or greater than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. “Exception: Where the assembly including the overcurrent devices protecting the feeder(s) are listed for operation at 100% of their rating, neither the ampere rating of the overcurrent device nor the ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be less than the sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load.” Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0658 Section 220-10(b) covers standard breakers, and the exception 100% rated breakers. NEC Section 220-10(b) and the Section 220-10(b) exception can be expressed by these formulas: Standard 80% Rated Design Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Special 100% Rated Design Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load The necessity for these NEC requirements results from circuit breaker testing procedures. A molded case circuit breaker is tested in open air to verify its nameplate ampere rating. The nameplate specifies a value of current the circuit breaker is rated to carry continuously without tripping within specific operating temperature guidelines. In most instances, a breaker is applied in an enclosure and performance could be adversely affected by slow heat dissipation and temperature rise. These factors must be considered regarding the ability of the breaker to comply with its nameplate ampere rating. Breaker Nameplate Example Figure 21.3-7. NEC Reference 34 35 36 100% Application– enclosure and wire ampacity requirements. Figure 21.3-6. Breaker Nameplate 37 38 39 A 100% rated breaker receives its UL listing based on tests conducted in a minimum size enclosure with minimum ventilation (if required) and minimum cable sizes, as stated on this nameplate example. All Cutler-Hammer 100% rated breakers have standard electronic trip units. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0659 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index Testing Conditions and Operating Conditions There are distinct differences between these conditions that are addressed in the NEC Section 220-10(b) by introducing an overcurrent device and associated hardware sizing factor. The sizing factor ensures reliable equipment performance under realistic conditions. Section 220-10(b) is the key to making the best system design choice. For feeders, Section 220-20(b) addresses the rating of all overcurrent devices that have been tested in open air but are applied in an enclosure. The thermal response of an overcurrent device applied in an enclosure will usually be faster than in open air, thus dictating the 125% requirement. The exception allows for properly tested and listed overcurrent devices to be applied at 100% of their nameplate rating. There is a Difference Between 100% Rated Breakers and 100% Rated Assemblies Special attention should be given to the word “assembly” in the NEC Exception. Normally, an assembly is listed for 100% operation only after being successfully tested as an assembly per UL requirements. For an assembly to receive a 100% rated UL listing, it must be tested separately by UL project engineers. Panelboards are tested to UL 67, switchboards tested to UL 891. Installing 100% rated breakers in an assembly does not automatically make it acceptable for a 100% rating. 90°C Wire 21.3-63 Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers Table 21.3-116. The Application — These Examples Illustrate the Cost Savings when the 100% Rated Approach is Utilized 20 A visual comparison of breaker, bus and cable sizes in the Three-Phase Distribution System examples (line diagrams) reveals how a 100% rated system design can provide cost savings. Load Feeder #1 Feeder #2 Feeder #3 Main Description Continuous 400 A 800 A 0 1200 A Noncontinuous 200 A 0 1000 A 1200 A Three-Phase Distribution System Line Diagrams Selection of either a 100% rated design or standard design must result from a system analysis beginning with the lowest feeder and concluding with the system’s main device. For these system examples, assume that all assembly testing has been successfully completed and either the 100% rated design or standard design can be selected. Each system is hypothetical and either approach will meet safety requirements. Loads were arbitrarily selected. The load table includes the calculations for minimum total loads in conformance with NEC Section 22-10(b). 22 23 24 Table 21.3-117. Available 100% Rated Circuit Breakers Frames 21 Rating at 480 V Trip Units 25 K-Frame 125/250/400 A Minimum Enclosure Size 24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm) CKD 35 kA CHKD 65 kA Digitrip 310 L-Frame 125/250/400/600 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm) CLD 35 kA CHLD 65 kA CLDC 100 kA Digitrip OPTIM 26 L-Frame 600 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 24 x 15 x 6-inches (609.6 x 381.0 x 152.4 mm) CLD 35 kA CHLD 65 kA CLDC 100 kA Digitrip 310 27 CMDL 50 kA CHMDL 65 kA Digitrip 310 28 M-Frame 800 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 42 x 18 x 7.5-inches (1066.8 x 457.2 x 190.5 mm) N-Frame 800/1200 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 42 x 22.75 x 11.5-inches (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm) CND 50 kA CHND 65 kA CNDC 100 kA Digitrip OPTIM N-Frame 800/1200 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 42 x 22.75 x 11.5-inches (1066.8 x 577.9 x 292.1 mm) CND 50 kA CHND 65 kA CNDC 100 kA Digitrip 310 R-Frame 1600/2000 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) CRD 65 kA CRDC 100 kA Digitrip OPTIM R-Frame 1600/2000 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) CRD 65 kA CRDC 100 kA Digitrip 510/610/810/910 R-Frame 1600/2000 A Minimum Enclosure Size with Ventilation 21.5 x 18 x 13-inches (546.1 x 457.2 x 330.2 mm) CRD 65 kA CRDC 100 kA Digitrip 310 Use with 9-inch (228.6 mm) Tee connector. 29 30 31 32 33 34 The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. 35 36 37 38 90°C Wire 39 Figure 21.3-8. Conductor Requirements 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-64 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Application Information — 100% Rated Circuit Breakers TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0660 Table 21.3-118. Standard 80% Rated Design 20 21 Noncontinuous Load + 125% of the Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load 0 + (1.25) (800) =1000 A 1000 + 0 = 1000 A Line Diagram 2700 A Calculation per NEC of Minimum Total Load 200 + (1.25) (400) =700 A Breaker Frame (F) Trip (T) Rating (F) (T) 800 A /700 A (F) (T) 1200 A /1000 A (F) (T) 1200A /1000 A (F) (T) 3000 A /3000 A Bus/Cable Rating 800 A 1000 A 1000 A 3000 A 3000A F 3000A T 3000A Bus 22 23 2-500 kcmil, Cu per phase 24 MCC 800A Bus 3-400 kcmil, Cu per phase 3-400 kcmil, Cu per phase Swbd. 1000A Bus 1000A Busway 25 Feeder Feeder Feeder #1 #2 #3 1200A F 1200A F 800A F 1000A T 1000A T 700A T (Noncontinuous Load) + (125%) (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 220-10(b). Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value. Table 21.3-119. Standard 100% Rated Design 26 27 Noncontinuous Load + Continuous Load = Total Minimum Load Calculation per NEC of Minimum Total Load 200 + 400 = 600 A Breaker Frame (F) Trip (T) Rating (F) (T) 600 A/600 A 0 + 800 = 800 A Line Diagram 1000 + 0 = 1000 A 2400 A 2500A F 2500A T 2500A Bus 28 29 Bus/Cable Rating (F) (T) 800 A/800 A (F) (T) 1200 A /1000 A (F) (T) 2500 A /2500 A Feeder Feeder Feeder #1 #2 #3 800A F 1200A F 600A F 800A T 1000A T 600A T 2-350 kcmil, Cu per phase 600 A 800 A 1000 A 2500 A MCC 600A Bus 2-600 kcmil, Cu per phase 30 32 33 (Noncontinuous Load) + (Continuous Load) per NEC Section 220-10(b) Exception. Sum of all NEC calculated minimum feeder loads. Nearest standard size, not less than calculated value. Table 21.3-120. The Result — Savings in Both Switchboard and Cable Costs Design Minimum Total Load (Amperes) Standard 700 1000 1000 2700 600 800 1000 2400 100% Rated Results 34 35 36 Swbd. 1000A Bus 800A Busway 31 3-400 kcmil, Cu per phase Rated Breaker 100% Rated Breaker Systems Save Money: Significant economic The standard design Dramatic economic Calculations indicate The 100% approach proadvantages — in lower rated requires higher rated, advantages are either approach vides significant economic and sized breakers, less cable, more expensive breaker achieved by using results in the same advantages. It not only and significant reductions in and bus. Although the the 100% rated size breaker and hard- permits use of the smaller equipment floor and wall minimum total load is design. Substantial ware. A 100% rated size 2500 ampere breaker space — can be realized when 700 amperes, most savings result from breaker would be (nearest standard size) the results of a systems breakers and hardware using an 800 ampere more expensive and main bus. Eaton offers analysis favor the 100% rated are available only in stan- busway and signifialthough the final a 2500 ampere frame design approach. dard sizes requiring even cant savings are also decision could rest breaker which further more expensive “nearest provided by the on whether or not enhances the economic standard size” breakers smaller breaker frame future load growth value of the 100% rated and hardware. and cable size. is anticipated. design. 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0661 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 21.3-65 Application Information — Series Rated System Series Rated Systems Evaluating the Protection Systems General Discussion Under most circumstances, selection of a series rated system will reduce initial cost and size, since downstream breakers are not fully rated for the prospective short circuit fault current at their point of application. The interrupting rating of the upstream breaker must always be equal to or greater than the available fault current at its line terminals. In addition, downstream breakers must have been tested in combination with the upstream breaker and shown to be protected by the upstream breaker at the assigned series rated interrupting rating. The net result is that the system can be assigned a “series rated” or “integrated” rating higher than the rating of the downstream breaker when it is tested or applied alone. Design of the system and selection of breakers is based on short circuit interruption test specified and witnessed by UL. Designed properly, all three systems protect electrical equipment with equal effectiveness. But initial cost and continuity of service can vary widely depending on the inherent characteristics of the system, and on the design philosophy adopted. Available Short Circuit Current. Service equipment shall be suitable for the short circuit current available at its supply terminal. Because of their blow-open design, most molded case circuit breakers are current limiting to some degree. In a series rated application and in the event of a major fault, both upstream and downstream breakers open, protecting the lower-rated downstream devices by limiting the let-through current. To develop a series rated protective system, it is suggested that the design engineer, after completing preliminary steps: Define available fault current at the line side terminals of the upstream breaker. ■ Select an upstream breaker with an interrupting rating equal to or greater than the available fault current. ■ Verify the series tested interrupting ratings of the selected combination of breakers by referring to the tables in this section. ■ Confirm, during installation, that the correct breakers have been selected by checking the nameplates appearing on the end-use equipment. ■ Fully Rated System A fully rated system is typically less costly than a selectively coordinated system and more costly than a series rated system. All breakers are rated for full fault current at their point of application in accordance with the National Electrical Code. The continuity of service provided by the system is less than with a selectively coordinated system, and can be more than a series rated system. Selectively Coordinated System A selectively coordinated system is the most costly of the three. All breakers are fully rated and upstream breakers must have adequate short-time delay adjusting capabilities. Continuity of service is the highest possible. Series Rated System A series rated system is the least costly. The upstream breaker is always fully rated, but the interrupting ratings of downstream breakers are normally lower. Service continuity can be acceptable after initial start-up, since the lower-level arcing faults most likely occur after that time can be cleared by the downstream breaker alone. However, under high fault conditions, both the upstream and downstream breakers would open, eliminating service to the affected portion of the system. National Electrical Code Requirements Requirements of the National Electrical Code for short circuit ratings may now be met by equipment that is marked with ratings adequate for the available fault current at their point of application in the electrical system. Refer to the current NEC for specific requirements. Approval. The conductors and equipment required or permitted by the Code shall be acceptable only if approved. See Examination of Equipment for Safety and Examination, Identification, Installation and Use of Equipment. See definitions of “Approved,” “Identified,” “Labeled” and “Listed.” Examination, Identification, Installation and Use of Equipment 1. Examination: In judging equipment, considerations such as the following should be evaluated. a. Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions of this Code. Suitability of equipment use may be identified by a description marked on or provided with a product to identify the suitability of the product for a specific purpose, environment or application. Suitability of equipment may be evidenced by listing or labeling. b. Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the protection thus provided. c. Wire-ending and connection space. d. Electrical insulation. e. Heating effects under normal conditions of use and also under abnormal conditions likely to arise in service. f. Arcing effects. g. Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity and specific use. h. Other factors which contribute to the practical safeguarding of persons using or likely to come in contact with the equipment. 2. Installation and Use: Listed or labeled equipment shall be used or installed in accordance with any instructions included in the listing or labeling. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-66 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Application Information — Series Rated System Interrupting Rating 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Equipment intended to break current at fault levels shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the system voltage and the current which is available at the terminals of the equipment. Equipment intended to break current at other than fault levels shall have an interrupting rating at system voltage sufficient for the current that must be interrupted. Circuit Impedance and Other Characteristics The overcurrent protective devices, the total impedance, the component short circuit withstanding ratings, and other characteristics of the circuit to be protected shall be so selected and coordinated as to permit the circuit protective devices used to clear a fault without the occurrence of extensive damage to the electrical components of the circuit. This fault shall be assumed to be either two or more of the circuit conductors, or between any circuit conductor and the grounding conductor or enclosing metal raceway. Motor Contribution 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 The fault current contribution of motors connected between series rated breakers must be considered. Article 240-86(b) in the 1999 edition of the National Electrical Code states that for series ratings the sum of the motor, full-load currents cannot exceed 1% of the interrupting rating of the lowerrated circuit breaker. The actual fault current contribution from induction motors is about 4 times their full-load current (impedance value of 25%). For example, if the downstream branch circuit breakers used in a series rated combination have an interrupting rating of 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a 480 volt system, the maximum full-load current of motors connected to that panel from the branch circuit breakers is 140 amperes (1%). For typical induction motors this is equivalent to a total horsepower at 480 volts of approximately 115 horsepower. Design/Test Considerations for Series Coordinated Circuit Breakers Test Procedures for all Cutler-Hammer molded case circuit breakers intended for application in series connected systems are in full compliance with all applicable paragraphs of the latest edition of UL 489. The entire system is tested, since such tests are the only way to correctly verify the performance of overcurrent devices under short circuit conditions. Calibration, interruption, trip-out and dielectric withstand tests are performed. Breakers in their as-received condition are used for the interrupting and intermediate interrupting capability tests. If agreeable to concerned parties, previously tested samples may be used. The interrupting rating of the line-side circuit breaker is equal to or greater than the maximum available fault current on the distribution system at its point of intended application. Tests comply also with the intent of the proposed revisions to applicable IEC documents. Tests are completed in a well-defined sequence: Interrupting tests. ■ Intermediate interrupting tests. ■ Trip-out tests. ■ Dielectric voltage-withstand tests. ■ Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Series C Circuit Breakers intended for application in series rated systems are subjected, in the following sequence, to interrupting ability, intermediate interrupting ability, trip-out, and dielectric voltage-withstand tests. During testing of the series rated circuit breakers, each breaker is mounted in the smallest enclosure in which it is to be used; openings in the enclosure do not exceed 10% of its total external area, and there are no openings directly opposite a vent in a circuit breaker case. The two enclosures are connected by a 12-inch (304.8 mm) conduit of any diameter. Each lead from test terminals to the line-side breaker is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) per breaker(s), and each load shorting the load-side breaker(s) is sized based on the rating of the load-side breaker. The combined length of the lead from the line-side overcurrent protective device of the load-side breaker and from the load-side breaker to the shorting point, is less than 4 feet (1.2 m) per pole. Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0662 Exception: the breakers may be mounted in the end-use equipment that will contain them and is marked for use with the series combination. The load-side breaker is positioned as close as possible to the line-side breaker(s). Line and load leads are less than 4 feet (1.2 m). A fuse is connected between the enclosure and line terminal of the pole least likely to arc to the enclosure, or the neutral, if the breaker is rated 120/ 240 or 480Y/277 Vac. The connection to the load-side of the limiting impedance is #10 AWG copper wire less than 6 feet (1.8 m) long. The fuse is a 30 A non-renewable type acceptable for branch circuit protection; its voltage rating is not less than the rating of the device, and its interrupting rating is not less than the available current. 1. Interrupting tests: a. The test circuit is closed on the series combination with all breakers fully closed; and b. The load-side breaker is closed on the circuit while the line-side breaker is fully closed. Note: Random closing is used in all 3-phase tests. When the circuit is closed on the combination, closing is controlled in singlephase tests so that closing occurs within ten electrical degrees of the zero-point of the supply voltage wave. 2. Intermediate interrupting tests at the specified available current and maximum voltage. Procedures are identical to those described in 1a and 1b (above) but at the maximum current level that causes the loadside breaker to open, but not the line-side breaker. If the line-side breaker is current-limiting, the series combination shall be evaluated in the region below its current- limiting threshold. (There is no need for these tests if the current is less than the interrupting rating on the load-side breaker.) 3. Trip-out tests of the load-side breaker at 250% of the marked ampere rating. 4. Dielectric voltage-withstand tests verify that the breaker can withstand, without breakdown, a 60 (48 – 62) Hz essentially sinusoidal potential for one minute. Note: For further information, see IEEE Standards 141, 242 and 446. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E Sheet 0663 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breaker Identification Marking of Panelboards Marking of all Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers is clear for easy identification of type, rating and operating status. Nameplates are color-coded for immediate identification of rating, and a color-coded bar identifies the type and interrupting rating at common application voltages. Operating status is indicated clearly by the position of the handle and color-coded flags. On and off positions are identified by English words and international symbols. Marking of panelboards conforms to the latest edition of UL 67. Markings are clear and understandable, and include the short circuit rating in rms amperes; maximum voltage rating for each short circuit rating; a statement indicating that additional or replacement devices shall be of the same type and of equal or greater interrupting capacity; and, when applicable, the identity of combinations of integral and branch circuit overcurrent devices that are required when applying the marked short circuit current rating. Scientists and engineers at the Eaton Testing Laboratory ensure that CutlerHammer circuit breakers are the most reliable and develop new concepts and improvements in breaker design. Designs and reliability are verified, products are improved continuously and qualified to meet UL, NEMA and other standards. In addition, engineers from any breaker or panelboard manufacturer can work along-side their peers from Eaton to test their products in the lab. The consolidated nameplate on all breakers provides complete identification and rating information in a format that is easy to read and understand. The interrupting rating of the series combination is never permitted to be marked on the downstream breaker. However, the series rating may be marked on panelboards in which the combination has been tested and listed if: The upstream breaker is installed in the panelboard as a main breaker. ■ The panelboard is a main-lug-only type and is specifically marked to indicate the type and rating of the upstream listed series tested breaker that must be applied with the panelboard. ■ 21.3-67 Application Information — Series Rated System Fuses Fuses can be used instead of circuit breakers in fully rated, selectively coordinated and series connected protection systems. See the tables in the back of this brochure for fuse breakout data applied to series connected designs. Don’t apply fuses using the up-overdown method, which has been recommended by some fuse manufacturers for sizing a current-limiting fuse that protects a downstream molded case circuit breaker with a specified rms symmetrical interrupting rating. The method can lead to erroneous and unsafe conclusions, and should not be used. Example: Assume a specific type of current-limiting fuse rated 2000 A. Then using the figure below: 1. Draw a vertical line from the prospective short circuit current of 200 kA to intersect the “typical peak let-through curve at “A.” 2. Draw a horizontal line left from Point “A” to intersect the “prospective peak” curve at “B.” 3. Drop a vertical line from “B” to intersect the horizontal axis and read the recommended rating, 65 kA rms, concluding that a circuit breaker with a 65 kA interrupting capacity will be protected by a specified 2000 A currentlimiting fuse. This conclusion is wrong when the downstream service has a blow-open contact assembly, as does a molded case circuit breaker or similar device. It may be valid when the current-limiting fuse is sized to protect a passive bus bar system. The reason: The up-over-down method ignores dynamic impedance (the inherent current-limiting of the downstream molded case circuit breaker). Such impedance is developed directly by the forces of the let-through current created when the contacts are blown open. For proper application of currentlimiting fuses, always refer to recommendations by the manufacturer of the circuit breaker, which are based on actual test data. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Up-over-down method. Asymmetrical Prospective Peak Curve at 15% Power Factor 460,000 Prospective Peak Let-Through Current in Amperes January 2005 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 150,000 B 27 28 A 2000A Current Limiter Fuse Curve 29 30 65,000 200,000 Prospective Short-Circuit rms Amperes Do Not Use This Method 31 Figure 21.3-9. Up-Over-Down Misapplication Application and Replacement of Breakers Apply and replace breakers prudently, within the design and operating parameters of the power system. Use the following tables to select the size and type of circuit breaker needed to fit virtually any application in series rated and other protective systems. Breakers are highly-compatible across ratings, capacities and characteristic; prudent replacements are as important as initial selection. 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-68 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems January 2005 Sheet 0664 Table 21.3-121. Index for Series Rating Tables 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Devices – Upstream/Downstream System Voltage Pages Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker 600 V 480 V 480Y/277 V 240 V 120/240 V 21.3-68, 21.3-69 21.3-70, 21.3-71 21.3-72, 21.3-73 21.3-74 to 21.3-76 21.3-77 to 21.3-80 Fuse/Circuit Breaker 600, 480, 480/277 240, 120/240 V 21.3-81, 21.3-82 Series Connected Ratings: Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breakers A wide range of breakers and combinations in the Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer line is available that has been tested in accordance with UL procedures for series connected ratings: individually applications with other undefined distribution equipment where series application ratings can be an advantage. enclosed breakers in series with main lug panelboards, main breakers integral with branch breakers in panelboards, in switchboards, and in meter centers. You can rely on the enclosed data for Table 21.3-122. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 600 Volt System Upstream Breaker Type FD, FDB, HFD Amperes, Maximum 150 Limiter Type FD, FDB, HFD 70 LCL LCL KDC KDC HLD, HLDB HKD JDC 400 250 400 400 600 400 250 — — — — — LFD3150R LFD3070R — — System kA 200 200 100 100 50 42 35 35 35 System Volts 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles FDB 15 – 70 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● FD 15 – 70 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● HFD 15 – 70 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● FDC 15 – 70 2, 3 ● ● ● FDB 80 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● FD 80 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● HFD 80 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● FDC 80 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● JD 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● JDC 70 – 250 2, 3 ● KD 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● KDC 100 – 400 2, 3 ● 36 LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● 37 HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 38 ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. 39 ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. 40 The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0665 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-69 Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Table 21.3-122. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 600 Volt System (Continued) Upstream Breaker FDC FDC HLD, HLDB KD, KDB HJD HFD HFD JD, JDB FD FD Amperes, Maximum 225 150 600 400 250 225 150 250 225 150 Limiter Type — — — — — — — — — — System kA System Volts Downstream Breaker Range Amperes 35 25 25 25 25 25 18 18 18 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Poles 15 – 70 2, 3 ● ● FD 15 – 70 2, 3 ● ● HFD 15 – 70 2, 3 FDC 15 – 70 2, 3 FDB 80 – 150 2, 3 ● ● FD 80 – 150 2, 3 ● ● HFD 80 – 150 2, 3 FDC 80 – 150 2, 3 JD 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 JDC 70 – 250 2, 3 KD 100 – 400 2, 3 KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 KDC 100 – 400 2, 3 LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 21 35 FDB 20 Type ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 22 23 24 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 25 26 27 28 29 30 ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-70 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems January 2005 Sheet 0666 Table 21.3-123. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 480 Volt System 20 Upstream Breaker Type FDB, FD, HFD Amperes, Maximum 150 21 Limiter Type System kA 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 System Volts Downstream Breaker Range Amperes FDB, FD, HFD 70 LCL LCL FCL NB TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC KDC JDC LA TRI-PAC 400 400 250 100 800 500 400 250 LFD3150R LFD3070R — — — P20 P12 — — P10 200 200 150 150 150 100 100 100 100 100 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 Poles EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● ● ● FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● FD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● FDC 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) ● ● JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● ● HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● ● LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 600 2, 3 ● (75 – 400) ● (75 – 500) ● (75 – 400) HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 600 2, 3 ● (75 – 400) LA, LAB, HLA 125 – 600 2, 3 ● ● (125 – 500) MA 125 – 800 2, 3 ● ● (125 – 500) MC, MCA, MCG, MCGA 400 – 800 2, 3 ● ● (400 – 500) NB 700 – 800 2, 3 ● ● ● (75 – 400) ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0667 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-71 Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Table 21.3-123. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 480 Volt System (Continued) Upstream Breaker Type LA TRI-PAC FDC FDC FB TRI-PAC HLD, HLDB Amperes, Maximum 200 225 150 100 Limiter Type P08 — — P06 100 100 100 100 65 65 65 65 65 35 25 25 25 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 System kA System Volts Downstream Breaker Range Amperes HKD HJD HFD HFD KD, KDB JD, JDB FD FD 600 400 250 225 150 400 250 225 150 — — — — — — — — — Poles EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (15 – 100) ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (15 – 100) ● ● (15 – 100) FDC 15 – 150 2, 3 JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ● (70 – 200) HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ● (70 – 200) KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 600 2, 3 HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 600 2, 3 LA, LAB, HLA 125 – 600 2, 3 MA 125 – 800 2, 3 MC, MCA, MCG, MCGA 400 – 800 2, 3 NB 700 – 800 2, 3 20 21 22 23 24 25 ● ● 26 27 ● 28 ● ● (75 – 400) ● (75 – 400) ● (125 – 400) 29 30 31 32 Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-72 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0668 Table 21.3-124. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 480Y/277 Volt System 20 Upstream Breaker 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Type FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD LCL LCL FCL KDC JDC FDC FDC LA TRI-PAC Amperes, Maximum 150 250 100 400 250 225 150 200 Limiter Type LFD3150R LFD3070R — — — — — — — P08 200 200 150 150 150 100 100 100 100 100 System Volts 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 480Y/277 Downstream Range Breaker Amperes Poles EHD 15 – 100 1 EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ● (80 – 100) FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (80 – 150) FD 15 – 150 1 FD 15 – 150 2, 3 HFD 15 – 150 1 HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 GHB, GHC 15 – 100 1 GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 30 31 32 400 System kA 28 29 70 ● (80 – 150) ● (80 – 150) ● (80 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 50) ● (15 – 50) ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● (15 – 70) ● (15 – 70) Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0669 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-73 Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Table 21.3-124. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 480Y/277 Volt System (Continued) Upstream Breaker Type FB TRI-PAC HKD HJD HFD HFD KD, KDB KDC HKD JDC HJD JD, JDB FD FD KD, KDB JD, JDB Amperes, Maximum 100 400 250 225 150 400 400 400 250 250 250 225 150 400 250 Limiter Type P06 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — System kA 100 65 65 System Volts 480Y/ 277 480Y/ 277 480Y/ 277 65 65 35 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 277 277 277 25 25 25 25 25 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 277 277 277 277 277 25 25 22 22 23 EHD 15 – 100 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FD 15 – 150 1 ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HFD 15 – 150 1 ● (15 – 100) ● HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (15 – 100) ● GHB, GHC 15 – 100 1 GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 21 22 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 480Y/ 277 277 277 277 Downstream Range Poles Breaker Amperes 20 ● ● ● ● (15 – 50) (15 – 50) 24 25 26 27 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 50) ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 50) ● ● ● ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-74 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0670 Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 240 Volt System 20 Upstream Breaker 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 LCL KDC LCL JDC FDC FCL FD, FDB, HFD FD, FDB, HFD HLD, HLDB Amperes, Maximum 400 400 250 250 150 100 150 Limiter Type — — — — — — LFD 3150R 70 600 LFD 3070R — System kA 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 System Volts 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 3 ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) HBAW, QHPW, QHCW 15 – 20 3 ● ● ● GB, GHB 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) ● GC, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) ● CA, CAH, HC 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ● ● ● BJ, BJH 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ED 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EDH 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ● ● ● EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) FD, FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● ● HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● ● DK 250 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 HLD 300 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ● ● HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ● ● 37 Type ● ● ● ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. 38 ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. 39 The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0671 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-75 Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 240 Volt System (Continued) Upstream Breaker Type NB TRI-PAC NB TRI-PAC LA TRI-PAC FB TRI-PAC KDC HKD JDC HJD EDH FDC HFD KDC HKD Amperes, Maximum 800 500 200 100 400 400 250 250 225 150 150 400 400 Limiter Type P20 P12 P08 P06 — — — — — — — — — 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 65 65 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● System kA System Volts Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 3 ● ● ● HBAW, QHPW, QHCW 15 – 20 3 ● ● ● GB, GHB 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● GC, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CA, CAH, HCA 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● BJ, BJH 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ● ● ED 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ● EDH 100 – 225 2, 3 EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FD, FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 ● ● ● HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 DK 250 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 HLD 300 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ● ● 20 30 ● ● 29 ● 31 ● 32 33 ● 34 Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-76 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0672 Table 21.3-125. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 240 Volt System (Continued) 20 Upstream Breaker 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 KD, KDB, DK HJD JD, JDB ED Amperes, Maximum 400 250 250 225 150 Limiter Type — — — System kA System Volts Downstream Breaker Range Amperes — 65 65 65 240 240 240 65 HFD — 65 240 240 FD KD, KDB, DK KD, KDB, DK CAH BJH QBHW, FDB QPHW QCHW, BRH 150 100 400 400 225 225 100 150 100 — — — — — — — — 65 — EHD 65 42 22 22 22 22 18 18 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 ● (15 – 70) ● ● Poles 15 – 100 2, 3 ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 100 2, 3 ● HBAX, QHOX, QHCX 15 – 100 3 HBAW, QHPW, QHCW 15 – 20 3 GB, GHB 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● GC, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● CA, CAH, HCA 100 – 225 2, 3 ● BJ, BJH 100 – 225 2, 3 ● ED 100 – 225 2, 3 EDH 100 – 225 2, 3 EHD 15 – 100 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● FD, FDB 15 – 150 2, 3 ● ● ● ● ● HFD 15 – 150 2, 3 JD, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3 HJD 70 – 250 2, 3 DK 250 – 400 2, 3 KD, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3 HKD 100 – 400 2, 3 LD, LDB 300 – 600 2, 3 HLD 300 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCG, LCA, LCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 HLC, HLCG, HLCA, HLCGA 75 – 400 2, 3 GB, GC 240 240 BA, BR, HQP, QC 38 Type ● ● (15 – 70) (15 – 70) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 70) (15 – 70) ● ● ● ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0673 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-77 Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 120/240 Volt System Upstream Breaker Type KDC LCL JDC FDC FCL FD, FDB, HFD Amperes, Maximum 400 LCL 400 250 250 225 100 150 Limiter Type FD, FDB, HFD 70 KDC — — — — — — LFD3150R LFD3070R — System kA 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 System Volts 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● ● BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 70) ● (15 – 100) QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● ● HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 2 ● ● ● ● QHPW, HBAW, QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2 ● ● ● ● QBGF, QPGF, QHCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ● ● ● ● GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) ● GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) ● EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (80 – 100) ● (15 – 70) ● FD 15 – 150 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) ● HFD 15 – 150 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● (80 – 150) ● (15 – 70) ● 20 400 21 22 ● ● (80 – 100) ● (80 – 100) ● (80 – 100) 23 ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● ● ● 25 26 27 Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 24 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-78 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0674 Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 120/240 Volt System (Continued) 20 21 22 Upstream Breaker Type JDC HJD EDH FDC HFD FB TRI-PAC LA TRI- PAC KDC Amperes, Maximum 400 HKD 250 250 225 150 225 100 100 400 Limiter Type — — — — — — P06 P08 — System kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 System Volts 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 120/240 Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles 65 120/240 BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 23 BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ● ● ● ● (15 – 70) ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 70) 24 QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● ● ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 ● ● ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● ● ● HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 2 ● ● ● ● ● QHPW, HBAW, QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2 QBGF, QPGF, QHCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ● (15 – 40) ● GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FD 15 – 150 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● HFD 15 – 150 1, 2 ● ● 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ● (15 – 40) ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0675 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-79 Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 120/240 Volt System (Continued) Upstream Breaker Type JDC Amperes, Maximum 250 150 400 400 250 250 225 150 225 100 Limiter Type — — — — — — — — — — System kA FDC 65 System Volts 65 120/240 120/240 HKD 65 KD, KDB, DK HJD 65 65 120/240 120/240 Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ● (15 – 100) ● ● BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ● ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 70 HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 65 120/240 120/240 HFD 65 65 120/240 FD GB, GC 65 120/240 21 120/240 120/240 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 15 – 100 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● QHPW, HBAW, QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2 QBGF, QPGF, GFCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ● (15 – 20) ● (15 – 20) ● (15 – 40) ● GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● FD 15 – 150 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● HFD 15 – 150 1, 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) (15 – 100) ● ● ● ● ● ● (15 – 100) (15 – 100) (15 – 100) (15 – 100) ● (15 – 20) 20 65 ● ● JD, JDB ED Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-80 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems January 2005 Sheet 0676 Table 21.3-126. Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — 120/240 Volt System (Continued) 20 Upstream Breaker 21 Type KD, KDB, DK 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 QBHW, QPHW, BWH QCHW BJH FDB EHD 400 225 100 225 225 150 100 Limiter Type — — — — — — — — 42 System Volts 22 120/240 22 120/240 22 120/240 25 120/240 22 18 120/240 120/240 18 120/240 120/240 Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● BA, BR, HQP, QC 15 – 125 2 ● ● (15 – 70) ● ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● (15 – 100) ● ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 70 1 ● ● QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 125 2 ● ● HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 70 1 HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 2 QHPW, HBAW, QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2 QBGF, QPGF, GFCB 15 – 30 1, 2 ● ● GB, GHB 15 – 100 1, 2 GC, GHC 15 – 100 1, 2 EHD 15 – 100 1, 2 FD 15 – 150 1, 2 HFD 15 – 150 1, 2 32 CAH Amperes, Maximum 400 System kA 22 KD, KDB, DK ● ● ● Circuit Breaker/Circuit Breaker series rated combinations shown in above tabulations by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. ● A solid circle in the row of a particular downstream breaker indicates that the upstream device associated with the column provides a Series Rating for the parameter values of the column heading. If the solid circle is accompanied by numbers in parentheses, then only the breaker ampacities listed in the parentheses have the Series Rating. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0677 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-81 Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems Table 21.3-127. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — Active Circuit Breakers Upstream Fuse Type RK J, T J, T RK RK J, T J, T RK J, T J, T RK J, T J, T RK J, T RK Amperes, Maximum 200 J, T 100 400 600 400 200 400 200 100 400 200 100 400 200 100 200 100 System kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 100 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 System Volts 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 120/240 120/240 120/240 240 240 240 480 480 277 277 ● ● Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles FD, HFD, FDC, FDB 15 – 150 2, 3, 4 JD, HJD, JDC, JDB 70 – 250 2, 3, 4 ● KD, HKD, KDC, KDB 100 – 400 2, 3, 4 ● BA, BR, HQP, QC, QBHW, BRH, QPHW, HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 70 1 ● ● ● BA, BR, HQP, QC, QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW, HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 2 ● ● ● QHPW, HBAW, QHCW 15 – 30 1, 2 BA, BR, HQP, QC, QBHW, BRH, QPHW, QCHW 15 – 100 2, 3 HBAX, QHPX, QHCX 15 – 100 3 ● ● ● HBAW, QHPW, QHCW 15 – 20 3 ● ● ● EHD 15 – 100 2, 3, 4 EHD 15 – 100 1 ● ● FD, HFD 15 – 150 1 ● ● 20 21 22 ● ● ● 23 ● 24 25 26 ● ● ● 27 ● ● ● 28 29 ● ● Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-82 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Home Breakers for Series Connected Protection of Power Distribution Systems TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0678 Table 21.3-128. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — Active Circuit Breakers 20 21 22 23 24 25 Upstream Fuse RK J, T RK J, T RK J, T J, T J, T J L RK L Amperes, Maximum 400 200 200 200 400 200 400 600 200 100 800 600 2000 System kA 200 100 200 200 100 100 200 100 65 100 200 200 200 System Volts 480/277 480/277 240 240 240 240 240 240 277 277 480 600 480 Downstream Breaker Range Amperes 15 – 15 – 100 2, 3 CA 125 – 225 2, 3 CAH, HCA 125 – 225 2, 3 MA, HMA, MC, MCAM MCG, MCGA, HMCA, HMCGA, HMCG, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND 125 – 800 2, 3 1000 – 3000 2, 3 20 Poles GHBS 27 J, T GHB, GHC PC, PCG, PCA, PCGA 26 Type ● 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection. Table 21.3-129. Fuse/Circuit Breaker Series Combinations — Active Circuit Breakers 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Upstream Fuse Type RK L J, T RK L J, T RK RK RK J, T RK J, T Amperes, Maximum 600 J, T 400 1200 600 600 400 1200 600 400 100 200 200 400 100 400 100 200 200 100 100 200 200 100 100 200 200 100 100 100 200 200 200 600 600 600 600 480 480 480 240 120/240 120/240 120/240 277 277 240 240 480/277 ● ● ● ● ● ● System kA System Volts Downstream Breaker Range Amperes Poles LC, LCA, LCG, LCGA, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA 125 – 600 2, 3 LC, LCA, LCG, LCAG, HLC, HLCA, HLCG, HLCGA 74 – 400 2, 3 GB, GC, GHB, GHC 15 – 100 1 GHB, GHC 15 – 100 1 GB, GC, GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 GHB, GHC 15 – 100 2, 3 MA, HMA, MC, MCA, MCG, MCGA, HMCA, HMCGA, HMCG, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND 125 – 800 2, 3 NB, NC, NCA, NCG, NCGA, HNB, HNC, HNCA, HNCG, HNCGA, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND 600 – 1200 2, 3 RK ● RK RK ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fuse/Circuit Breaker and Fuse/Motor Circuit Protector series connected combinations shown in above tabulations listed by Underwriters Laboratories in their Component Directory (Yellow Book) under “Circuit Breakers — Series Connected.” Only active Circuit Breaker types are included in the above tabulations. For additional information on inactive styles, consult the UL Yellow Book or contact Eaton. RK ratings shown are applicable for both RK1 and RK5 fuses. RK1 fuses in higher ampere ratings may also provide series protection. The series combinations shown are UL recognized component ratings only. Consult the equipment manufacturer for applicable UL recognized assembly combinations. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0679 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Index 21.3-83 Selection Guide — Panelboard Replacement Breakers Panelboard Replacement Breaker Selection Guide Panelboard Replacement Breakers are generally for use as replacement for out-of-production panelboard circuit breakers where both physical and electrical interchangeability is required. Where possible, consideration should be given to application of either Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer or original Westinghouse circuit breakers For additional information on replacement circuit breakers and accessories refer to the Cutler-Hammer YES Catalog. Table 21.3-130. Replacement Breakers Breaker Type Amperes 240 Vac 21 22 Panelboard Replacement Breaker Interrupting Ampere Rating 120 Vac 20 277 V (1-Pole) 480 Vac Asym. Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym. Sym. Asym. 125 V (1-Pole) 250 Vdc Sym. 600 Vac — — — — — — — — — — 5,000 — — 5,000 — 23 RE RE REA 15 – 20 15 – 100 15 – 20 — 7,500 — — 7,500 — — 7,500 — — 7,500 — 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 — — — REA REH RF 15 – 100 15 – 100 15 – 100 7,500 — — 7,500 — — 7,500 18,000 18,000 7,500 20,000 20,000 — 10,000 — — 10,000 — — 14,000 14,000 — 15,000 15,000 — — 14,000 — — 15,000 5,000 — — 5,000 10,000 10,000 RFA RHF RHFA 15 – 150 15 – 100 15 – 150 — — — — — — 18,000 65,000 65,000 20,000 75,000 75,000 — — — — — — 14,000 25,000 25,000 15,000 30,000 30,000 14,000 18,000 18,000 15,000 20,000 20,000 — — — 10,000 20,000 20,000 RJ LA LA 70 – 225 70 – 225 125 – 400 — — — — — — 22,000 42,000 42,000 25,000 50,000 50,000 — — — — — — 18,000 30,000 30,000 20,000 35,000 35,000 14,000 22,000 22,000 15,000 25,000 25,000 — — — 10,000 20,000 20,000 RK RKL RLM 70 – 225 125 – 400 125 – 800 — — — — — — 25,000 42,000 42,000 30,000 50,000 50,000 — — — — — — 22,000 30,000 30,000 25,000 35,000 35,000 22,000 22,000 22,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 — — — 10,000 20,000 20,000 27 RHK RHKL RHLM 70 – 225 125 – 400 125 – 800 — — — — — — 65,000 65,000 65,000 75,000 75,000 75,000 — — — — — — 35,000 35,000 35,000 40,000 40,000 40,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 — — — 20,000 20,000 20,000 28 Current Panelboard Circuit Breaker Type Out-ofProduction Circuit Breaker Type RE REA REH E EA EH RFA RHFA RF FA HFA F RHF RJ RK Volts ac (50/60 Hz) 240 480 600 ● ● RF3100 is a newly manufactured, 3-Pole, 100 Ampere Trip Panelboard Replacement Breaker for an out-ofproduction F3100. R Designates new panelboard replacement breaker ● ● ● F Identifies the out-of-production circuit breaker frame HF J K ● ● ● 3 Number of poles RHK RKL RHKL HK KL HKL ● ● ● Notes: RLM RHLM LA LA LM HLM JK JKL ● ● ● ● ● Last manufacture date — 1974. Last manufacture date — 1967. Replacement of all out-of-production panelboard circuit breakers other than the “JK” and “JKL” types are designated by the easily identifiable addition of an “R” prefix to the out-ofproduction circuit breaker catalog number that they replace. 100 Trip ampere rating 1. Panelboard Replacement Circuit Breakers have non-interchangeable trip units and the same interrupting capacity as the out-of-production circuit breakers that they replace. 2. The RE breaker has off-center terminals just like the E breaker it is replacing. 3. For out-of-production breakers, the “B” suffix denotes 277 Vac rating for the Panelboard Replacement Breaker. (Example: RE3020B) 25 26 29 An Example: Table 21.3-131. Replacement Breakers 24 4. Some Panelboard Replacement Breakers do not have the same physical dimensions or mounting holes as the breakers that they replace. For example, the types REH, RFA and RHFA are 6 inches (152.4 mm) in length and the breakers they replace, EH, FA and HFA are 6-1/2 inches (165.1 mm) in length. Mounting hardware is provided with each breaker to resolve these differences, and must be installed to ensure a proper fit. 5. Panelboard Replacement Breakers can be installed in the following style of out-of-production Westinghouse panelboards: ABH NEB A2B NHDP CDP NHEB NAB NH1B NA1B NLAB-AB NA1B-LX NLAB-ABH 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 NDP 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.3-84 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0680 This page intentionally left blank. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0681 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units Index 21.4-1 General Description Contents 20 Trip Unit Selection Chart . . . . . 21.4-1 Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units (Digitrip and OPTIM) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-2 Protection Features . . . . . . . 21.4-3 System Communications . . 21.4-4 Time-Current Curve Shaping . 21.4-5 Zone Selective Interlocking . . 21.4-6 Digitrip OPTIM . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-7 Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . 21.4-8 Magnum DS Trip Units (Digitrip 520, 520M, 520MC and 1150) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4-9 Zone Selective Interlocking . . 21.4-9 Digitrip Selection Guide. . . . 21.4-10 21 22 23 24 Circuit Breakers with Microprocessor Trip Units 25 26 Table 21.4-1. Digitrip RMS Circuit Breaker Trip Unit Selection Chart Description Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip OPTIM Digitrip Digitrip OPTIM Digitrip OPTIM Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip 310 310+ 510 550 610 810 750 910 1050 520 520M 520MC 1150 27 Circuit Breaker Type Molded Case J250-Frame 250 Ampere X X — — — — — — — — — — — Molded Case K-Frame 400 Ampere X — — X — — — — X — — — — Molded Case L-Frame 600 Ampere X X — X — — — — X — — — — Molded Case M-Frame 800 Ampere X — — — — — — — — — — — — Molded Case N-Frame 1200 Ampere X — — X — — — — X — — — — Molded Case R-Frame 2500 Ampere X — X — X X — X X — — — — Insulated Case SPB — — X — X X X X X — — — — Power Breaker DSII/DSLII — — X — X X X X X — — — — Power Breaker Magnum DS — — — — — — — — — X X X X Curve Shaping Functions 5 5 9 10 9 9 10 9 10 9 9 9 10 Front Adjustable X X X — X X — X — X X X — Programmable — — — X — — X — X — — — X Zone Selective Interlocking — — X X X X X X X X X X X Load Monitoring — — — X X X X X X — X X X Diagnostics — — X X X X X X X X X X X Power/Energy Monitoring — — — — — X — X X — — — X Harmonics — — — — — — — X X — — — X Waveform Capture — — — — — — — X X — — — X — X X X X — — X X — — — — X — X X X Communications — — — X Ground Fault Alarm X — — X Optional feature. Requires auxiliary alarm module below R-Frames. Not available in J250-Frame yet. Note: For time current curves for the trip units, see the Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker CD-ROM SA.73A.01.T.E. CA08104001E 29 30 31 32 33 Features 28 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21.4-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Digitrip and OPTIM Trip Units The Eaton Corporation offers the most comprehensive range of electronic trip units in the industry for Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers, SPB Insulated Case Circuit Breakers, and DSII Power Circuit Breakers. All electronic trip units are rms sensing and can be applied from 70 amperes up through 5000 amperes. Eaton offers electronic trip units as standard for molded case circuit breakers rated 1000 amperes and above and offers electronic trip units as optional for molded case circuit breakers 70 amperes up through 800 amperes. Digitrip electronic trip units are ac devices that employ microprocessorbased technology that provides a true rms current sensing means for proper correlation with thermal characteristics of conductors and equipment. The primary function of the Digitrip electronic trip unit is to provide circuit protection. This is achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker shunt trip when pre-set current levels and time delay settings are exceeded. Electronic trip units are applied to distribution systems when high standards of protection and coordination are called for. In addition, electronic trip units can provide further enhanced features such as alarming, diagnostics, system monitoring and communications. Cutler-Hammer rms sensing trip units fall into two main categories: Front adjustable trip units (Digitrip RMS 310, 310+, 510, 610, 810 and 910). ■ Programmable trip units (Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050). ■ Note: OPTIM 750 programmable trip units not available in molded case circuit breakers. Front Adjustable Trip Units Front adjustable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to nine time-current setting options that are set by switches mounted on the front of the trip unit. The application for front adjustable trip units would be distribution systems that can be coordinated within the range of settings available and that do not require sophisticated coordination strategies to be applied down through the distribution system to small rated breakers. Home TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0682 Programmable Trip Units Programmable trip units are electronic trip units that have up to ten timecurrent setting options that are programmed electronically by the use of a programming device. The application for programmable trip units would be high integrity distribution systems that require superior levels of system coordination coupled with system alarming, diagnostics and monitoring. Rating Plugs Rating plugs provide a means to establish the breaker’s continuous current rating. Rating plugs are colorcoded and interchangeable to make it easy to match the correct rating plug with the correct trip unit. The same rating plug can be applied to both 50 and 60 Hz distribution systems. In general, most rating plugs are of the fixed ampere rating type. Eaton offers an adjustable rating plug as an option for the Digitrip RMS 310 trip unit. 30 31 Digitrip 310 32 33 Digitrip 1050 Digitrip 310+ 34 35 OPTIM 550 Digitrip 910 36 37 OPTIM 1050 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0683 Home TOC << >> Index Additional Protection Features Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS Electronic trip units are designed and built with safety and reliability in mind, both to protect the user and the equipment as well as making sure the trip functions within its design parameters. By providing a SURE Start discriminator circuit to Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units as well as to Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip units that do not have an instantaneous setting, the user is protected should a faulted circuit exist. The discriminator (or making current releases as it is often called) is set at 11 times the rating plug ampere rating and is enabled for approximately the first 10 cycles of current flow. Should a fault condition exist, the breaker will trip with no intentional time delay on closing, protecting the user from a potentially unsafe condition. In addition to a discriminator, an instantaneous override is present in all molded case and insulated case circuit breakers to provide additional protection for the breaker. The instantaneous override is factory set nominally just below the breaker withstand rating. Digitrip electronic trip units can operate reliably in ambient temperatures that range from -20°C to +85°C. In the unlikely event that temperatures exceed this ambient, the trip unit has a built-in overtemperature trip to protect the trip unit should the temperature exceed these design parameters. Thermal Memory Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate powered thermal memory, i.e., the units remember recent overcurrent events which may have initiated the trip timing sequence, and then returned to nominal levels, halting the sequence prior to trip initiation. In the event that the current levels again exceed the pickup set point within a few cycles of the original pickup, the unit’s memory recalls the previous near trip and automatically imposes a shorter delay time. In effect, the unit treats multiple time related events as a single continuous event thereby preventing system damage due to cumulative overheating. As a further enhancement, the trip units incorporate an unpowered thermal memory feature. In the event that current levels cause the breaker to trip and the breaker is immediately reclosed, the trip unit remembers the previous overcurrent trip and again imposes a shorter delay time should a further overcurrent occur before a sufficient cooldown period has elapsed. CA08104001E Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units 21.4-3 General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units Thermal memory protects the distribution system from cumulative overheating caused by repeated overcurrent conditions. OPTIM trip units allow this to be turned ON or OFF. System Alarms Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 electronic trip units incorporate a high load alarm capability. Set at 85% of Ir, the alarm will be initiated once the load current exceeds 85% for 40 seconds. Once this occurs, the HILD message will flash in the display window and the power/relay module will operate to send a remote signal. Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units also offer a high load alarm capability but with more flexibility. OPTIM trip units have a high load alarm that can be programmed to operate between 50% and 100% of Ir. Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate a ground fault alarm capability. Settings available for ground fault alarm are the same as for ground fault trip. Once a ground fault alarm occurs, both local and remote signal indication is available. (OPTIM 550 is remote only.) Peak demand exceeded alarms are available with Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 as well as Digitrip OPTIM 1050. Power quality and total harmonic distortion levels can be set with Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050 and an alarming feature can be initiated should these levels be exceeded. System Diagnostics Whenever a circuit breaker trips, it is normally imperative that the cause of trip be determined quickly, the faulty conditions rectified, and the breaker put back into service. Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810, 910, and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units incorporate a complete package of systems diagnostics to meet this challenge. Four cause-of-trip LEDs are embedded in the front of the trip unit case, indicating that the cause-of-trip was either a long delay, short delay, instantaneous or ground fault. Remote signal indication for cause of trip as well as magnitude of trip information is also available. Systems Monitoring Digitrip RMS and Digitrip OPTIM electronic trip units offer a complete menu of monitoring capability to include current, power and energy, power factor, power quality harmonics, and other related parameters with a high level of accuracy. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com Digital Display Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 have a large, easy-to-read 4-digit alphanumeric display mounted on the trip unit. The display is supported by LEDs that indicate which parameter is being displayed along with the unit the value is displayed in, e.g., kA etc. 20 21 22 Current Monitoring Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 trip units are capable of monitoring currents in individual phases (A, B, C) as well as ground currents. Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip units are capable of monitoring currents in individual phases (A, B, C) as well as neutral and ground currents. 23 24 25 Values are displayed in the digital display window in kA. Accuracy of the current monitored values is ±2 percent of full scale sensor rating. 26 Power and Energy Monitoring 27 For the trip unit to calculate true power and energy values, a Potential Transformer Module is required. This PTM is mounted internally (R frame and larger) or externally (N frame or smaller) to the breaker, and provides voltage to the trip unit. Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units are capable of monitoring peak power demand, present power demand, and reverse power flow in MW. Additionally, both forward and reverse energy consumption in MWh can be monitored. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units can also monitor the same power and energy parameters but the units are displayed in kW and kWh. 28 29 30 31 32 The accuracy of power monitored values is ±4 percent of full scale sensor/frame rating. 33 The accuracy of energy monitored values is ±5 percent of full scale sensor/frame rating. 34 Both the RMS 910 and OPTIM 1050 report power factor. Digitrip RMS 910 trip units have the additional capability of monitoring line-to-line voltage. 35 36 Harmonics Monitoring Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050 trip units are capable of monitoring values of current harmonics. Percentage of total harmonic content can be monitored for each level of harmonic content up to the 27th harmonic. Additionally, a total harmonic distortion (THD) value can be calculated and displayed providing the user with total system current harmonic monitoring capability. 37 38 39 40 21.4-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units Home General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 System Communications Sub-Network Displays The Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer PowerNet monitoring, protection, and control communications system is the most highly reliable, cost-effective communications system available. Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 as well as Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic trip units include a capability to communicate within a PowerNet System. Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 electronic trip units can be connected as part of a sub-network system to a panelmounted user interface device known as an Assemblies Electronic Monitor (AEMII). All trip units connected to the sub-network can have their settings and monitoring information displayed on the AEMII which is normally mounted on the front of the switchgear or switchboard. Note: Communications is an optional accessory on the Digitrip OPTIM 550. PowerNet system communications are over a shielded twisted pair communications cable that connects devices daisychain style. PowerNet system communications with Digitrip electronic trip units can be applied for variable levels of sophistication as described as follows: Display Digitrip RMS 610, 810 and 910 electronic trip units are front adjustable trip units where all settings and display information is accessible from the front of the trip unit. Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic trip units are programmable by the use of a hand-held programmer called a Digitrip OPTIMizer. The Digitrip OPTIMizer accesses, displays and configures trip settings and information. Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic trip units can also be connected as part of a sub-network system to a panel-mounted user interface device called a Breaker Interface Module II (BIMII). A Breaker Interface Module accesses, configures and displays OPTIM trip unit information as well as for Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 trip units as well as Energy Sentinels. The BIMII, like the AEMII, is normally mounted on the front of an electrical assembly. (See Section 4 for more information on the BIMII.) Digitrip RMS 810, 910, and Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic trip units can be connected into a field bus system which is called PowerNet. All control, monitoring and configuration of the trip units can be carried out from a central personal computer. Please see Section 2 of this catalog for more information on PowerNet. 32 << >> January 2005 Sheet 0684 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Breaker status (open, closed, tripped). Address and baud rate. Trip event time. Trip event counter. View protection settings. Change protection settings. Load current values. Power and energy values. Power factor. Line-to-line voltage. Power quality current harmonic values. Waveform capture. Remote status messages. Remote control-trip/close/reset. Reset demand/energy/trip event. Digitrip OPTIM only. Digitrip RMS 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050 only. Digitrip RMS 910 only. Field Testing System maintenance is an extremely important part of any distribution system and the capability to test electronic trip units is an essential requirement. Digitrip RMS 310 and 310+ electronic trip units can be tested using a test set to perform long delay, short delay, and ground fault functional testing. The test set is connected to the trip unit via a built-in test receptacle. Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 as well as Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic trip units have an integral test capability and do not require an external test set. Both phase and ground, trip and no trip, testing can be carried out with the breaker in the connected cell position. 33 34 35 36 Index Control and monitoring features provided by Digitrip RMS 810 or 910 and Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 or 1050 trip units include: PowerNet Network TOC Breaker Interface Module (BIM) 37 An Auxiliary Power Module can be provided for bench testing Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810, 910, and Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 electronic trip units, or when the breaker is disconnected from the cell. The Auxiliary Power Module operates from a 120 Vac supply and provides control power to test the trip unit. 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0685 Home TOC << >> Index Short Delay (S) Curve Shaping Economy 3. Short Delay Pickup Determine or set the level of fault current at which the short time trip delay countdown is actuated. Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS 310 trip units are available with up to five phase and ground adjustments on the front of the trip unit. Selective system coordination with both upstream and downstream devices can be achieved to provide an economic solution for less sophisticated distribution systems. 4. Short Delay Sets the amount of time the breaker will carry both a low level and high fault currents before tripping. 1 2B 2 a. Flat Response I2t out: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic trip devices. b. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with fuses and thermal-magnetic breakers. 2A 3 4B Time 21.4-5 General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units Time-Current Curve Shaping 4 4A 6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units Instantaneous (I) 5 7B 7 5. Instantaneous Pickup Determines the level of fault current which will actuate a trip with no time delay. Ground Fault (G) 7A Current in Multiples Figure 21.4-1. Time-Current Curve Shaping Note: See selection guide charts for availability of adjustments. Long Delay (L) 1. Long Delay Pickup Determines the continuous ampere rating of the breaker. 2. Long Delay Time Determines the amount of time the breaker will carry a low level overload before tripping. a. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic trip devices and for coordination with thermal-magnetic circuit breakers. b. I4t Response I4t in: For coordination with fuses and upstream transformer damage curves. 6. Ground Fault Pickup Determines the level of fault current at which the ground fault trip delay countdown is actuated. 7. Ground Fault Delay Determines the amount of time the breaker will carry a ground fault before tripping. a. Flat Response I2t out: For coordination with other circuit breakers with electronic ground fault settings. b. I2t Response I2t in: For coordination with zero sequence ground fault relays, fuses, and thermalmagnetic breakers. Dependent Curve Shaping For more sophisticated selective coordination systems Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units are available with up to nine curve shaping choices via switches on the front of the unit. Curve shaping flexibility is provided by dependent long and short delay adjustments that are based on continuous amperes (Ir) selection. Dependent curve shaping offers the user additional system coordination possibilities as well as closer thermal protection of the system. Dependent curve shaping adjustments are shown by the blue portion of the graphic time-current curve on the front of the trip unit. Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip units offer programmable dependent curve shaping via ten curve shaping choices that are programmed electronically into the trip unit. OPTIM also offers virtual infinite settings to allow the user to optimize coordination for a selectively coordinated distribution system. In addition, time-current set points can be downloaded via a communication system from a central personal computer. Digitrip OPTIM is normally applied to systems where system integrity is very important. 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.4-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units Home General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Breaker Number 1 Fault 1 Ground Fault Setting: 0.3 Seconds Time Delay Zone 2 Breaker Number 2 Zone Selective Interlocking Wiring Fault 2 Zone 3 Ground Fault Setting: 300 A Pickup No Time Delay Breaker Number 3 Fault 3 31 36 37 Sheet 0686 0.5 Seconds Time Delay Zone 1 Zone selective interlocking provides positive system coordination by allowing the breaker closest to the fault to trip without any preset time delays. This is achieved by setting up the distribution system as shown in the adjacent diagram. The hardwired connection between the trip units sends a restraining signal upstream allowing the breaker closest to the fault to act instantaneously. Zone selective interlocking also reduces stress on the distribution system by isolating faults without time delays. 30 35 >> Ground Fault Setting: Note: Optional accessory on the OPTIM 550. 29 34 << January 2005 Zone selective interlocking capabilities are available with Digitrip RMS 510, 610, 810 and 910 trip units as well as Digitrip OPTIM 550, 750 and 1050 trip units. 28 33 Index Zone Selective Interlocking 27 32 TOC Load Figure 21.4-2. Zone Selective Interlocking Fault 1 Fault 3 There are no interlocking signals. The main breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously. The branch breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the fault; and Zone 3 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 2 trip unit; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to Zone 1. Fault 2 The feeder breaker trip unit will initiate the trip instantaneously to clear the fault; and Zone 2 will send an interlocking signal to the Zone 1 trip unit. The Zone 1 trip unit will begin to time out, and in the event that the feeder breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds. 38 Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip units will begin to time out, and in the event that the branch breaker in Zone 3 would not clear the fault, the feeder breaker in Zone 2 will clear the fault in 0.3 seconds. Similarly, in the event that the feeder breaker in Zone 2 would not clear the fault, the main breaker in Zone 1 will clear the fault in 0.5 seconds. 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0687 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units Index General Description — Molded Case, SPB and DSII Trip Units Digitrip OPTIM 20 Description Digitrip OPTIM is a programmable communicating microprocessor-based low voltage electronic trip unit system for Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Low Voltage DSII Power Breakers. Digitrip OPTIM trip units are available in three models: Digitrip OPTIM 550 and 1050, for the K-, L-, N- and R-Frames (70 through 2500 amperes), as well as Digitrip OPTIM 550, Digitrip OPTIM 750 and Digitrip OPTIM 1050 for the SPB Insulated Case Circuit Breakers and DSII Power Circuit Breakers. Digitrip OPTIM trip units are fully programmable and can be applied as a standalone breaker with a hand-held Digitrip OPTIMizer programmer for configuring the trip unit, displaying information and testing. In addition, OPTIM can be applied as a low voltage assembly with a panel-mounted Breaker Interface Module (BIM) to configure, display and test. Alternatively, OPTIM can be applied as part of a fully integrated IMPACC/PowerNet system. (See Section 2). Features Fully programmable, rms sensing trip unit. ■ Available in K, L, N and R Series C breakers and DSII power breakers. ■ Available in 80% and 100% rated breakers. ■ Available in LSI, LSIG or LSIA configurations. ■ Note: Ground fault alarm only. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Available in three models OPTIM 550, OPTIM 750 and OPTIM 1050. 10 function time-current curve shaping options, including a new I4t long delay time or slope. Short delay and ground delay Zone Selective Interlocking (Optional on 550). Additional programmable protection features including thermal memory and discriminator functions. Advanced warning systems including high load alarm, ground fault alarm. Full system diagnostics capability. System monitoring features including: ❑ Load current ❑ Power and energy ❑ Power factor ❑ Power quality — harmonics PowerNet communications saves individual wiring of breakers. CA08104001E 21.4-7 21 22 23 24 Circuit Breaker Trip Units and Accessories Hand-Held Programmer The Digitrip OPTIMizer hand-held programmer accesses, displays and configures information from OPTIM Trip Units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of the trip unit and is powered by a nine-volt battery, or an auxiliary power module. ■ ■ An operator can use the OPTIMizer to: Complete Initial System Setup: ❑ Select breaker address ❑ Select system frequency (50/60 Hz) ❑ Set system baud rate ❑ Set system password ■ Configure the System: ❑ Change time-current set points ❑ Select protection options ❑ Select alarm levels ■ ■ ■ Display Information: ❑ Breaker information ❑ Time-current set points ❑ Metered values ❑ Trip event information Test Trip Unit Performance: ❑ Phase and ground ❑ Trip/no trip Panel Mounted User Interface The Breaker Interface Module can be mounted directly on the assembly or at a remote location and can be used to access, configure and display information from OPTIM Trip Units. An operator can use the Breaker Interface Module to: ■ Complete Initial System Setup: ❑ Select system frequency (50/60 Hz) ❑ Set system password Configure the System: ❑ Change time-current set points ❑ Select protection options ❑ Select alarm levels Display Information: ❑ Breaker information ❑ Time-current set points ❑ Metered values ❑ Trip event information ■ Test Trip Unit Performance: ❑ Phase and ground ❑ Trip/no trip ■ Expanded Energy Monitoring: ❑ Set addresses for group energy monitoring ❑ Group energy readings ■ Common Alarm Contacts: ❑ Three Form C contacts ❑ Saves wiring to each breaker ■ Local and Remote Indication: ❑ Remote indication/alarming ❑ Breaker status LED indication ■ Expanded Communications: ❑ Communicate with: – OPTIM Trip Units – Digitrip RMS 810 and 910 Trip Units – IQ Energy Sentinels and Universal – IQ Energy Sentinels – A total of 50 devices 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.4-8 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units Home TOC Index << >> Technical Data — Molded Case, SPB, and DSII Trip Units Selection Guide January 2005 Sheet 0688 Table 21.4-2. Molded Case and DSII Digitrip Selection Guide 20 21 22 23 Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip RMS 310+ Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip OPTIM 750 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes K, L, N SPB, DSII, DSLII 800 – 2500 A R, SPB, DSII, DSLII 800 – 5000 A R, SPB, DSII, DSLII 800 – 5000 A K, L, N, R, DSII, DSLII 70 – 5000 A Breaker Type Frame J250 , K, L, M, N, R JG, LG Ampere Range Interrupting Rating at 480 V 15 – 2500 A 20 – 600 A R, SPB, DSII, DSLII 800 – 5000 A 70 – 1200 A R, SPB, DSII, DSLII 800 – 5000 A 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) Ordering Options LS LSG LS LSI LSG LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LSI, LSI (A), LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LSI(A), LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LSI (A), LISG Fixed Rated Plug (In) Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0.5 – 1.0(In) 10 Seconds No 40 – 100% Frame 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.4 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.5 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.4 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No No No 1 – 5 Seconds No 1 – 5 Seconds No No 1 – 5 Seconds Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes 0.5 – 1.0 x Ir Yes 0.85 x Ir Yes 0.5 – 1.0 x Ir Yes 0.85 x Ir Yes 0.85 x Ir Yes 0.5-1.0 x Ir Short Delay Pickup 200 – 800% x (In) — 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) 150 – 800% x (Ir) 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) 150 – 800% x (Ir) 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) 200 – 600% S1&S2 x (Ir) 150 – 800% x (Ir) Short Delay Time I2t Short Delay Time Flat 100 ms No No Yes Inst – 300 ms No 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms Short Delay Time Z.S.I. No No Yes Optional Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 200 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) 200 – 800% x (In) 200 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) 200 – 800% x (In) 200 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) 200 – 600% M1&M2 x (In) 200 – 800% x (In) Protection 24 Long Delay Protection (L) 25 Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Long Delay Pickup Long Delay Time I2t 26 Long Delay Time I4t Long Delay Thermal Memory High Load Alarm LSI LSIG Short Delay Protection (S) 27 28 No 100 – 500 ms Inst – 300 ms 100 – 500 ms Instantaneous Protection (I) 29 Instantaneous Pickup No 200 – 800% x (In) No Yes Yes Yes No 20 – 100% Frame No 20/25 – 100% No 25 – 100% x In 20/25 – 100% 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms No 20/25 – 100% No No 20/25 – 100% 25 – 100% x In 20/25 – 100% 25 – 100% x In 25 – 100% x In 20/25 – 100% 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms — No 100 – 500 ms Yes 100 – 500 ms Optional 100 – 500 ms Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Discriminator No Instantaneous Override Yes 30 Ground Fault Protection (G) 31 Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst – 500 ms Ground Fault Z.S.I. No Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes 32 System Diagnostics 33 Ground Fault Alarm Ground Fault Pickup Ground Fault Delay I2t Cause of Trip LEDs Magnitude of Trip Information Remote Signal Contacts Yes Var/Frame No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes System Monitoring 34 Digital Display Current Voltage No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes 35 Power and Energy Power QualityHarmonics Power Factor No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes (Over PowerNet Only) Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Optional No Yes Yes Yes Yes Test Set Test Kit Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, Integral PowerNet (Optional) OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet 36 Communications PowerNet Testing 37 Testing Method 38 39 J250 Frame adjustments are not by rating plug. Ground fault version not available yet. Adjust by rating plug. LS/LSG only. Not to exceed 1200 amperes. L and N Frames *20 – 100% x Is. R-Frame *25 – 100% x In. By OPTIMizer/BIM. Yes with addition of Energy Sentinel. BIM Is In Ir = = = = Breaker Interface Module Sensor Rating Rating Plug LDPU Setting x In 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0689 Home TOC << >> Index Magnum DS Digitrip Trip Units The next generation of proven Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Digitrip RMS trip units is available exclusively on CutlerHammer Magnum DS breakers. These true rms sensing trip units provide accurate coordination with the conductors and equipment the breaker is designed to protect. Eaton introduced the first microprocessor-based trip unit and has advanced the technology into a new family of UL and CSA listed Digitrip RMS Electronic and Programmable Trip Units designed and engineered exclusively for Magnum DS Breakers. Digitrip RMS 520 enables the user as many as nine phase and ground current protection settings for maximum flexibility in trip-curve shaping and multi-unit coordination, and adds ground current protection settings. ■ Digitrip RMS 520M adds metering for phase, neutral and ground current…with a four-character LCD display window. ■ Digitrip RMS 520MC adds communication of trip values and breaker status (open, closed and tripped). ■ Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units 21.4-9 General Description — Magnum DS Trip Units ■ Digitrip RMS 1150 provides programmability for more sophisticated distribution systems. ❑ Increased protection and coordination capabilities. ❑ Systems monitoring information including voltage, current, power, energy, power factor, and harmonic distortion values, viewed on a three-line LED display. ❑ Two programmable contacts for customer use. ❑ Time stamping of trip events for improved troubleshooting and diagnostics. ❑ Accuracy of 1% on voltage and current metered values, and 2% on energy and power. ❑ Systems diagnostic information. ❑ PowerNet communications. ❑ Waveform capture. Zone Selective Interlocking The Digitrip RMS Zone Selective Interlocking capability provides positive system coordination without time delays. Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) allows the breaker closest to the fault to trip without any preset time delay. The breaker closest to the fault trips first, while the remainder of the distribution system remains online, thus avoiding unnecessary and costly downtime. 20 21 22 23 24 Digitrip RMS 1150 Programmable Trip Unit This state-of-the-art trip unit with true rms sensing can be programmed at the faceplate or remotely with a PC using the PowerNet communications system. All system parameters as well as programming information can be viewed on the easy-to-read three-line digital display window. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.4-10 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Microprocessor Trip Units Home Technical Data — Magnum DS Digitrip Selection Guide TOC Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0690 Table 21.4-3. Magnum DS Digitrip Selection Guide 20 21 Magnum DS Digitrip Trip Units The next generation of proven Digitrip RMS Trip Units is available exclusively on Magnum DS Breakers. These true rms sensing trip units provide accurate coordination with the conductors and equipment the breaker is designed to protect. 22 23 24 Trip Unit Type Digitrip 520 Digitrip 520M Digitrip 520MC Digitrip 1150 Ampere Range rms Sensing 200 – 5000 A Yes 200 – 5000 A Yes 200 – 5000 A Yes 200 – 5000 A Yes Protection and Coordination 25 Protection Ordering Options Fixed Rating Plug (In) Overtemperature Trip LSI, LSIG Yes Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes LSI, LSIG, LSIA Yes Yes 26 Long Delay Protection Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Long Delay Setting Long Delay Time I2t at 6 x Ir No 0.4 – 1.0 x (ln) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.4 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.4 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds No 0.4 – 1.0 x (In) 2 – 24 Seconds Long Delay Time I4t Long Delay Thermal Memory High Load Alarm No Yes No No Yes No No Yes No Short Delay Pick-Up Short Delay Time I2t at 8 x Ir Short Delay Time Flat Short Delay Time ZSI 200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir) 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms Yes 200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir) 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms Yes 200 – 1000% M1 x (Ir) 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms Yes 1-5 Seconds Yes 0.5-1.0 x Ir 150% – 1000% x (Ir) 100 – 500 ms 100 – 500 ms Yes 27 Short Delay Protection 28 29 Instantaneous Protection Instantaneous Pick-Up Making Current Release Off Position 200 – 1000% M1 x (In) 200 – 1000% M1 x (In) 200 – 1000% M1 x (In) 200% – 1000% x (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection Ground Fault Alarm Ground Fault Pick-Up Ground Fault Delay I2t at .625 x In No 025 – 100% x (In) 100 – 500 ms Yes 025 – 100% x (In) 100 – 500 ms Yes 025 – 100% x (In) 100 – 500 ms Yes 025 – 100% x (In) 100 – 500 ms Ground Fault Delay Flat Ground Fault ZSI Ground Fault Thermal Memory 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes 100 – 500 ms Yes Yes Cause of Trip LEDs Magnitude of Trip Information Trip Log (3 Events) Yes No No Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Remote Signal Contacts Programmable Contacts No No Yes No Yes No Yes 2 Digital Display Electronic Operations Counter Current (Accuracy — % FS Sensor) No No No 4-Character LCD No Yes (2%) 4-Character LCD No Yes (2%) 24-Character LED Yes Yes (1%) Voltage (Accuracy — %) L to L Power and Energy (Accuracy – %) Apparent Power kVA and Demand No No No No No No No No No Yes (1%) Yes (2%) Yes Reactive Power kvar Power Factor Crest Factor No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Power Quality — Harmonics % THD Waveform Capture No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No Test Set No No Test Set No Yes Test Set No Yes Integral and Test Set Yes 30 31 System Diagnostics 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 System Monitoring System Communications IMPACC/PowerNet Testing Method Triplink 39 40 In = Sensor and plug rating. Ir = LDPU setting. Not to exceed 1200 amperes on ground. Cause of trip — L, S, I, G, and making current release. Optional GF only. Tester for secondary injection. Must utilize NT-based PowerNet software to enable communications. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0691 Home TOC << >> Index Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers 21.5-1 General Description NEMA 1 General Purpose NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water and Dustproof Surface or Flush Mounting 15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc Stainless Steel — Type 304, Surface Mounting 15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc for service entrance application. A NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight design which includes knockouts is available. These units are rated 15 – 400 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc. UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319 NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location Cast Aluminum, Explosion-proof Surface Mounting 15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319 NEMA 3R Rainproof Surface Mounting Interchangeable Hubs (through 400 amperes) 15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc 21 22 23 24 NEMA 1 Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer NEMA 1 enclosed breakers are designed for indoor use in commercial buildings, apartment buildings and other areas where a general purpose enclosure is applicable. The breaker is front operable and is capable of being padlocked in the OFF position. (Padlocking not available on enclosures for QUICKLAG breakers.) Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed with Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. Both surface and flush mounted enclosures are available. 20 25 NEMA 4/4X, 5 This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X and 5 requirements for water and dustproof applications and has no knockouts or other openings. It is particularly well suited for use in dairies, borax mines, breweries, paper mills and other process industries. The operating handle can be padlocked in the OFF position, and is interlocked to prevent the door from opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings through 1200 amperes are Underwriters Laboratories listed as suitable for service entrance application. UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319 NEMA 12 Dustproof Surface Mounting No Knockouts or Other Openings 15 – 1200 A, 600 Vac, 500 Vdc 26 NEMA 7/9 Hazardous Location Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B, C, D, Divisions 1, 2; Class II, Groups E, F, G, Divisions 1, 2. This special service cast aluminum enclosure is supplied with a wide, machined flanged cover to prevent igniting outside atmospheres by arcing from inside the enclosure. Front operable, the handle padlocks in the OFF position. Enclosures rated 600 amperes and above have lift-off hinges for ease of assembly. 27 28 29 30 Note: XFDN050 is not Group B compliant. 31 UL File Number E84577 Enclosed Circuit Breakers 32 33 34 35 NEMA 3R This general purpose outdoor service center employs a circuit breaker inside a weatherproof sheet steel enclosure to serve as a main disconnect and protective device for feeder circuits. The operating handle can be padlocked in the OFF position, and is interlocked to prevent the door from opening when the breaker is ON. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for service entrance application. UL File Number E7819 CSA File Number LR84319 CA08104001E NEMA 12 Dustproof The Cutler-Hammer Type 12 enclosure is designed in line with specifications for special industry application where unusually severe conditions involving oil, coolant, dust and other foreign materials exist in the operating atmosphere. The handle padlocks in the OFF position and the cover is interlocked with the handle mechanism to prevent opening the cover with the circuit breaker in the ON position. Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 36 37 38 39 40 21.5-2 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers Home General Description — Enclosures Only Table 21.5-1. Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide 20 21 Breaker Frame Breaker Ampere Range Enclosure NEMA Class Catalog Number Series C Breakers 15 – 100 22 1 Surface 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SGDN100 RGDN100 JGDN100 DGDN100 WGDN100 23 EHD, FD, FDB, HFD, FDC 15 – 100 1 Surface 1 Flush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SFDN100 FFDN100 RFDN100 JFDN100 DFDN100 WFDN100 7/9 Cast Alum. 7/9 Cast Alum. XFDN050B XFDN225B 1 Surface 1 Flush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SFDN225 FFDN225 RFDN225 JFDN225 DFDN225 WFDN225 1 Surface 1 Flush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SJDN250 FJDN250 RJDN250 JJDN250 DJDN250 WJDN250 24 EHD, FD, FDB HFD, FDC 15 – 50 60 – 225 FD, FDB, HFD, FDC, ED, EDH, EDC 125 – 225 26 27 JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 125 – 250 28 29 JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 125 – 250 7/9 Cast Alum. XJDN250B KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK 125 – 400 1 Surface 1 Flush 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SKDN400 FKDN400 RKDN400 JKDN400 DKDN400 WKDN400 30 31 32 33 34 KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK 125 – 400 7/9 Cast Alum. XKDN400B LD, LDB, HLD, LDC 300 – 600 1 Surface 3R 12 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SLDN600 RLDN600 JLDN600 WLDN600 LD, LDB, HLD, LDC MDL, HMDL 300 – 600 400 – 800 7/9 Cast Alum. XMCN800B MDL, HMDL, ND, NDC, HND 400 – 1200 1 Surface 3R 12 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SNDN1200 RNDN1200 JNDN1200 WNDN1200 ND, HND, NDC 400 – 1200 7/9 Cast Alum. XNDN1200B 35 36 37 Suitable for use with one-pole breaker base mounting plate kit. QCCBP required. Maximum wire size: 4/0. Table 21.5-2. Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable Maximum Enclosure Rating (Amperes) 100 (RFDN100 and SFDN100) Main Lug Size Cu/Al Ground Lug Size Catalog Cu/Al Number (1) 14 – 1/0 (1) 14 – 2 DH100NK INK100 100 (All Others) (1) 14 – 1/0 (1) 14 – 1/0 250 (1) (1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK250 38 400 (1) 4 – 750 kcmil or (2) 1/0 – 250 kcmil (1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK400 (2) 250 – 500 kcmil (1) 4 – 300 kcmil INK600 39 1200 600 Index << >> January 2005 Sheet 0692 Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide (Continued) Breaker Frame Breaker Ampere Range Enclosure NEMA Class Catalog Number 15 – 100 1 Surface 1 Flush 3R 12 12K 4/4X SFD100E FFD100E RFDN100E JFDN100E DFDN100E WFDN100E 15 – 100 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 St. Steel RFDN150 JFDN150 DFDN150 WFDN150 125 – 400 1 Surface 3R 12 4/4X, 5 St. Steel SNDN1200 RNDN1200 JNDN1200 WNDN1200 FB-P 15 – 100 3R 12 12K 4/4X, 5 St. Steel RFDN150 JFDN150 DFDN150 WFDN150 LA-P 70 – 400 1 Surface 3R 12 4/4X SNDN1200 RNDN1200 JNDN1200 WNDN1200 12 4/4X, 5 St. Steel JNDPN800 WNDPN800 Earth Leakage Breakers GC, GHC, GD 2- and 3-Pole only GHCGFEP 1-Pole Only 25 TOC 6 – 350 kcmil ELFD, ELHFD & ELFDC (3-Pole Only) Current Limit-R Breakers FCL LCL TRI-PAC Breakers NB-P 500 – 800 Requires additional adapter plate. Table 21.5-3. Raintight Hubs — Dimensions in Inches (mm) Hub Diameter in Inches (mm) Catalog Number Small Hubs For use with RGDN and RFDN All rainproof enclosures 30 through 400 A are shipped with plate over cutout. Hubs are not supplied with screws on 30 through 400 A enclosures. Use screws from plate. .75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) DS075H1 DS100H1 DS125H1 DS150H1 DS200H1 Large Hubs For use with RJDN. RKDN has two cutouts 2.00 (50.8) R1H200 2.50 (63.5) R1H250 3.00 (76.2) R1H300 Required if using Type DS hubs on RJDN and RKDN enclosures. R1HA Table 21.5-4. Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures — Dimensions in Inches (mm) Description Compliance Conduit Opening Catalog Number A Universal Breather/Drain Fitting is installed in the top of an enclosure to provide ventilation to minimize condensation and in the bottom to allow drainage of accumulated condensation while maintaining explosion-proof integrity. Type BD: NEMA 7 – Class I, Groups C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB NEMA 9 – Class II, Groups F, G .50 (12.7) XPBD2 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or (1) #6 – 250 kcmil INK1200 (4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil Type DBB: .50 (12.7) NEMA 7 – Class I, Groups B, C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + Hydrogen NEMA 9 – Class II, Groups E, F, G XPDBB50 40 For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0693 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers Index 21.5-3 Dimensions and Weights — Enclosure Only Table 21.5-5. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm) E B C A D Figure 21.5-1. NEMA 1 Surface Mounted Catalog Number Approximate Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum Amperes 20 Box Dimensions A B C D E SGDN100 12 (5) 100 17.50 (444.5) 8.41 (213.5) 6.28 (159.5) 13.03 (331.0) 1.20 (30.6) SFDN100 12 (5) 100 19.12 (485.6) 9.13 (231.9) 5.20 (132.1) 17.00 (431.8) N/A SFDN150 15 (7) 150 23.25 (590.6) 8.41 (213.5) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.2) 1.20 (30.6) SFDN225 15 (7) 225 23.25 (590.6) 8.41 (213.5) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.2) 1.20 (30.6) SJDN250 31 (14) 250 34.70 (881.5) 10.92 (227.4) 7.20 (183.0) 30.00 (762.0) 1.88 (47.6) SKDN400 53 (24) 400 38.81 (985.9) 11.01 (281.0) 10.94 (277.8) 34.00 (863.6) 2.28 (57.9) SLDN600 81 (37) 600 45.88 (1165.2) 14.31 (363.6) 12.38 (314.3) 46.56 (1182.7) 1.91 (48.4) 178 (81) 1200 61.22 (1555.0) 21.44 (544.5) 15.41 (391.3) 61.84 (1570.8) 1.97 (50.0) SNDN1200 Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights. Total width, due to door clip is 9.95 (252.7). Single centered mounting hole provided. B D C A 23 24 25 27 Catalog Number Approximate Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum Amperes Box Dimensions A B C D E FFDN100 12 (5) 100 18.81 (477.9) 9.72 (246.9) 6.28 (159.5) 13.03 (331.0) 1.86 (47.2) FFDN150 15 (7) 150 24.56 (623.9) 9.72 (246.9) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.2) 1.86 (47.2) FFDN225 15 (7) 225 24.56 (623.9) 9.72 (246.9) 6.28 (159.5) 18.75 (476.2) 1.86 (47.2) FJDN250 32 (15) 250 36.02 (914.8) 12.23 (310.7) 7.20 (183.0) 30.00 (762.0) 1.88 (47.6) FKDN400 53 (24) 400 40.13 (1019.2) 12.38 (314.3) 10.94 (277.8) 34.00 (863.6) 2.94 (74.6) 22 26 Table 21.5-6. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted — Dimensions in Inches (mm) E 21 28 29 30 31 Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights. 32 Figure 21.5-2. NEMA 1 Flush Mounted 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.5-4 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Dimensions and Weights — Enclosures Only January 2005 Sheet 0694 Table 21.5-7. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof — Dimensions in Inches (mm) 20 E C 21 22 A D ON OFF 23 Catalog Number Approximate Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum Amperes 26 27 28 29 30 C D E 100 19.91 (505.6) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 18.53 (470.7) 1.70 (43.3) JFDN100 14 (6) 100 19.91 (505.6) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 18.53 (470.7) 1.70 (43.3) JFDN150 18 (8) 150 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.3) JFDN225 18 (8) 225 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.3) JJDN250 37 (17) 250 37.53 (953.3) 11.56 (293.7) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.5) 1.94 (49.2) JKDN400 58 (26) 400 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.4) 14.06 (357.2) 39.94 (1014.4) 1.97 (50.0) JLDN600 81 (37) 600 48.31 (1227.2) 14.91 (378.6) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.7) 1.92 (48.8) JNDPN800 110 (50) 800 63.59 (1615.3) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.7) — 1.97 (50.0) JNDN1200 170 (77) 1200 63.59 (1615.3) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.7) 61.84 (1570.8) — DGDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91 (505.6) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) — — DFDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91 (505.6) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) — — DFDN150 19 (9) 150 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) — — DFDN225 19 (9) 225 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) — — DJDN250 36 (16) 250 37.53 (953.3) 11.56 (293.7) 10.22 (259.6) — — DKDN400 53 (24) 400 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.4) 14.06 (357.2) — — Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights. Table 21.5-8. NEMA 3R Rainproof — Dimensions in Inches (mm) 31 E C 32 33 B 14 (6) Figure 21.5-3. NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof 25 A JGDN100 B 24 Box Dimensions A Catalog Number Approximate Weight Lbs. (kg) Maximum Amperes Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D E RGDN100 14 (6) 100 19.91 (505.6) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 18.53 (470.7) 1.70 (43.3) ON RFDN100 14 (6) 100 19.12 (485.6) 9.95 (252.8) 5.14 (130.6) 17.00 (431.8) N/A OFF RFDN150 19 (9) 150 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.3) RFDN225 19 (9) 225 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.3) RJDN250 40 (18) 250 37.50 (952.5) 11.56 (293.7) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.5) 1.94 (49.2) RKDN400 60 (27) 400 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.4) 14.06 (357.2) 39.94 (1014.4) 1.97 (50.0) RLDN600 84 (38) 600 48.31 (1227.2) 14.91 (378.6) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.7) 1.92 (48.8) 175 (79) 1200 63.59 (1615.3) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.7) 61.84 (1570.8) 1.97 (50.0) D 34 B 35 Figure 21.5-4. NEMA 3R Rainproof 36 RNDN1200 37 Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights. Single centered mounting hole provided. 38 39 40 Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E January 2005 Sheet 0695 Home TOC << >> Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers Index 21.5-5 Dimensions and Weights — Enclosures Only Table 21.5-9. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel — Dimensions in Inches (mm) E B D A Approximate Weight Lbs. (kg) Catalog Number C Maximum Amperes A B C D E WGDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91 (505.6) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 18.53 (470.7) 1.70 (43.3) WFDN100 16 (7) 100 19.91 (505.6) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 18.53 (470.7) 1.70 (43.3) WFDN150 20 (9) 150 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.3) WFDN225 20 (9) 225 25.66 (651.7) 8.84 (224.6) 9.31 (236.6) 24.28 (616.7) 1.70 (43.3) WJDN250 39 (18) 250 37.50 (952.5) 11.56 (293.7) 10.22 (259.6) 35.77 (908.5) 1.94 (49.2) WKDN400 60 (27) 400 41.69 (1058.9) 11.75 (298.4) 14.06 (357.2) 39.94 (1014.4) 1.97 (50.0) WLDN600 88 (40) 600 48.31 (1227.2) 14.91 (378.6) 15.50 (393.7) 46.56 (1182.7) 1.92 (48.8) 185 (84) 1200 63.59 (1615.3) 22.00 (558.8) 17.63 (447.7) 61.84 (1570.8) 1.97 (50.0) ON OFF 20 Dimensions in Inches (mm) Figure 21.5-5. NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel WNDN1200 Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights. 21 22 23 24 25 26 Table 21.5-10. NEMA 7/9Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — 15 – 250 Amperes Catalog Number Breaker Size Amperes Number of Outlets Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mounting A B Inside J C Outside D E F G H K Dim Standard Conduit Size Approximate Weight Lbs. kg XFDN050B 15 – 50 4 5.50 13.13 14.13 6.13 10.75 5.25 10.63 15.25 8.88 (139.7) (333.5) (358.9) (155.7) (273.1) (133.4) (270.0) (387.4) (225.6) 2.00 (50.8) 1.50 (38.1) 38 17.3 XFDN100B 60 – 100 4 6.00 18.00 19.00 6.50 16.00 5.50 11.00 20.50 9.00 (152.4) (457.2) (482.6) (165.1) (406.4) (139.7) (279.4) (520.7) (228.6) 2.31 (58.7) 2.00 (50.8) 57 25.9 XFDN225B 125 – 225 4 10.25 22.63 — (260.4) (574.8) 11.38 20.00 6.38 16.38 25.13 9.63 (289.1) (508.0) (162.1) (416.1) (638.3) (244.6) 3.50 (88.9) 2.50 (63.5) 104 47.2 70 – 225 4 8.50 27.13 — (215.9) (689.1) 11.25 29.88 7.38 16.00 29.50 12.31 (285.8) (759.0) (187.5) (406.4) (749.3) (312.7) 4.00 3.00 (101.6) (76.2) 145 65.8 4 9.50 27.25 — (241.3) (692.2) 11.25 29.88 8.06 16.38 35.00 12.38 (285.8) (759.0) (204.7) (416.1) (889.0) (314.5) 4.19 4.00 (106.4) (101.6) 170 77.2 XJDN225B XJDN250B 250 Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights. Maximum wire size: 4/0. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 (2) 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) NPT 34 35 36 37 38 Figure 21.5-6. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — Dual 3 and 4 Point Mounting Available as Standard on F-Frame 100 A and Below 39 40 CA08104001E For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com 21.5-6 Circuit Breakers & Trip Units — Low Voltage Enclosed Circuit Breakers Home TOC Index << >> Dimensions and Weights/Technical Data — Enclosures and Breakers January 2005 Sheet 0696 Table 21.5-11. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals — 400 – 1200 Amperes 20 Catalog Number Breaker Size Amperes 21 22 23 24 Weight Dimensions in Inches (mm) Overall Enclosure Enclosure Mounting Conduit Standard Conduit A B C E F H I Size Location Lbs. XKDN400B 400 35.00 (889.0) 16.38 (416.1) 12.63 (320.8) 9.50 (241.3) 27.25 (692.2) 3.00 (76.2) 4.19 (106.4) 4.00 (101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 170 77 XLDN600B 600 37.88 (962.2) 23.88 (606.6) 14.25 (362.0) 16.00 (406.4) 45.38 (1152.7) 4.00 (101.6) 5.00 (127.0) 4.00 (101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 419 191 XKCN800B 800 47.88 (1216.2) 13.63 (346.2) 12.81 (325.4) 16.13 (409.7) 40.75 (1035.1) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 4.00 (101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 228 104 1200 64.00 (1625.6) 26.00 (660.4) 21.38 (543.1) 27.56 (700.0) 38.63 (981.2) 6.50 (165.1) 4.38 (111.3) 4.00 (101.6) 1, 3 & 6, 8 567 257 XNDN1200B kg Weight values are for the enclosure only. See Table 21.5-12 for breaker weights. Maximum wire size: 500 kcmil. Power cables must enter and leave from opposite ends (through-feed). 25 Conduit Position No. 1 Table 21.5-12. Typical Breaker Weights 2 3 Frame G-MTG. Holes (4) 26 B J F-MTG. A 27 kg G 2 0.9 E 3 1.4 F 5 2.3 J 12 5.4 K 13 5.9 I D C 28 Lbs. 29 H H E-MT 8 30 7 6 L 20 9.1 M 30 13.6 N 45 20.4 Figure 21.5-7. NEMA 7/9 Cast Aluminum with Weather Resistant Seals Table 21.5-13. Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data 31 1st Field Enclosure Type 32 NEMA 1 33 NEMA 3R NEMA 12 NEMA 12K NEMA 4/4X, 5 NEMA 7/9 Flush Surface Stainless Cast Al. F S R J D W X 2nd Field Breaker Family 3rd Field Maximum Ampacity NEMA Enclosure Type Definitions NEMA Standard G-Frame F-Frame J-Frame K-Frame L-Frame M-Frame N-Frame 50 100 150 225 250 400 600 1200 1 Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against contact with the enclosed equipment. 3R Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain, sleet, and external ice formation. 12 Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids. 12K Type 12K enclosures with knockouts are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids other than at knockouts. 4/4X Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water, and corrosion; and will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. 5 Type 5 enclosures are used for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust and falling dirt. 7 Type 7 enclosures are for use indoors in locations classified as Class I, Groups B, C or D as defined in the National Electrical Code. 9 Type 9 enclosures are for use in indoor locations classified as Class II, Groups E, F or G as defined in the National Electrical Code. 34 1st 2nd Field Field 35 3rd Field R FD N 150 36 NEMA Enclosure 37 38 39 40 Breaker Frame NEMA Enclosure “N” in this position indicates enclosure complies with NEC gutter space requirement. XFDN050 is not Group B compliant. Cutler-Hammer is a federally registered trademark of Eaton Corporation. UL is a federally registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ISO is the registered trademark and sole property of the International Organization for Standardization. NEMA is the registered trademark and service mark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. CSA is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association. Uniform Building Code (UBC) is a trademark of the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO). National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Mass. For more information visit: www.EatonElectrical.com CA08104001E
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Modify Date : 2013:12:14 01:59:27-05:00 Create Date : 2005:03:02 11:39:42-05:00 Metadata Date : 2013:12:14 01:59:27-05:00 Format : application/pdf Description : Tab 21 - 150 dpi Document ID : uuid:ea644f75-9be9-457c-a42d-b41c0d976ff1 Instance ID : uuid:f4493533-9067-4372-b914-0d88fb7c3bc1 Has XFA : No Page Count : 126 Page Layout : SinglePage Subject : Tab 21 - 150 dpi Author : Zoltun Design Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 for Macintosh Title : CA08104001EEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools